WO2023098464A1 - 数据传输的方法和装置 - Google Patents

数据传输的方法和装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023098464A1
WO2023098464A1 PCT/CN2022/131811 CN2022131811W WO2023098464A1 WO 2023098464 A1 WO2023098464 A1 WO 2023098464A1 CN 2022131811 W CN2022131811 W CN 2022131811W WO 2023098464 A1 WO2023098464 A1 WO 2023098464A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
information
communication device
blocks
data block
sub
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/131811
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
张彦清
李雪茹
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202210017417.3A external-priority patent/CN116248239A/zh
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023098464A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023098464A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/12—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
    • H04L1/14—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the signals are sent back to the transmitter to be checked ; echo systems
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/12—Wireless traffic scheduling

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the communication field, and in particular, to a data transmission method and device.
  • HARQ hybrid automatic repeat request
  • XR extended reality
  • the present application provides a data transmission method and device, in order to effectively combine the network coding method with the HARQ mechanism, improve transmission reliability, reduce transmission delay, and improve user experience.
  • a method for data transmission is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a communication device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a chip or a circuit) of the communication device. This is not limited. For the convenience of description, the following is referred to as The execution by the first communication device is taken as an example for description.
  • the method may include: the first communication device receives N pieces of first control information, where the N pieces of first control information are used to indicate M transmission blocks, and the N pieces of first control information are also used to indicate that M transmission blocks are used to transmit the first One or more sub-blocks of the data block after network coding NC, where N and M are positive integers, and M is greater than or equal to N; the first communication device receives M transmission blocks based on the N pieces of first control information.
  • the first communication device learns from the N pieces of first control information that the M transmission blocks indicated by the N pieces of first control information are used to transmit the same data block (that is, the first data block) after network coding One or more subblocks.
  • the first communication device may also transmit correctly based on channel decoding The block successfully decodes the first data block, and then there is no need to retransmit the transmission block that has not been correctly decoded by the channel, reducing the delay caused by retransmission, and meeting the delay requirements of the business as much as possible.
  • the transmission block by establishing the connection between the transmission block and the first data block, it is possible to know which transmission blocks the first data block corresponds to, and then it is possible to determine the corresponding NC decoding of the first data block based on the first data block Feedback information for multiple transport blocks. For example, if the first data block can be successfully decoded after NC decoding, then even if some of the M transport blocks are decoded correctly, the first communication device may no longer need to re-receive the unchanneled data through retransmission. The correct transport block is decoded, so that after the first data block is successfully decoded, the first communication device can set all the HARQ process numbers of the M transport blocks as ACK, so that retransmission is unnecessary. Therefore, unnecessary retransmission is reduced, data transmission delay is reduced, and user experience is improved.
  • one or more of the first control information in the N pieces of first control information each include first information, and one of the one or more first control information includes The one or more pieces of first information are used to indicate that the M transmission blocks are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block passing through the NC, wherein the one or more pieces of first information meet a preset condition.
  • each of the N pieces of first control information includes first information
  • the N pieces of first information included in the N pieces of first control information are used to indicate that M transmission blocks are used to transmit the first data One or more sub-blocks after the block passes through NC.
  • the N pieces of first information satisfy preset conditions (such as the value of the N first pieces of information satisfies a certain rule, or takes a value within a preset value range, or takes the same value)
  • the M The transmission blocks are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block after passing through the NC.
  • part of the first control information in the N pieces of first control information all includes first information
  • the part of the first information included in the N pieces of first control information is used to indicate that M transmission blocks are used to transmit the first data block One or more subblocks after NC.
  • the first first control information among the N first control information includes the first information
  • the last first control information includes the first information
  • the first first control information and the last first control information When the first information in satisfies the preset condition (for example, the value of the two first information satisfies a certain rule, or the value is within the preset value range, or the value is the same), the M transmission blocks are used One or more sub-blocks after the first data block is transmitted through the NC.
  • each of the N pieces of first control information includes first information, and the N pieces of first information included in the N pieces of first control information It is used to indicate that the M transmission blocks are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks after the first data block passes through the NC, where the values of the N pieces of first information are the same.
  • each first control information includes the first information, and if the values of the first information in different first control information are the same, it is considered that the transmission blocks indicated by the different first control information are used to transmit the same One or more sub-blocks of a data block after passing through the NC; if the values of the first information in different first control information are different, it is considered that one or more of the transmission blocks indicated by the different first control information after passing through the NC Multiple subblocks do not belong to the same data block.
  • the first communication device can determine whether the M transmission blocks are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the same data block after passing through the NC through the first control information, that is, the first control information can determine whether the M transmission blocks are transmitted Whether one or more sub-blocks after NC belong to the same data block.
  • the first communication device can determine, according to the multiple pieces of first control information, which transmission blocks and the multiple sub-blocks transmitted through the NC belong to the same data block.
  • the method further includes: the lower layer of the first communications device sending The upper layer of a communication device sends K sub-blocks, and the K sub-blocks are the sub-blocks transmitted by the correct channel decoding of the M transmission blocks, and K is a positive integer; the upper layer of the first communication device performs NC translation on the K sub-blocks code, and send the second information to the lower layer of the first communication device according to the NC decoding result, the second information is used to indicate whether the first data block is successfully decoded after the K sub-blocks undergo NC decoding.
  • the first data block can be successfully decoded after the K sub-blocks are NC-decoded.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device sends K sub-blocks with correct channel decoding to the upper layer. If the upper layer of the first communication device can successfully decode the first data block through K sub-blocks, the first communication device The upper layer can notify the lower layer, and then the lower layer can know that there is no need to perform operations related to the first data block according to the notification, for example, there is no need to retransmit the transport blocks in the M transport blocks, and for example, it is not necessary to continue to receive and/or There is no need to decode the transport block used to transmit the first data block, etc.
  • the upper layer of the first communication device may notify the lower layer, and the lower layer may know that the first data block has not been successfully decoded through the K sub-blocks according to the notification. In this way, the waste of air interface resources can be reduced, and the power consumption overhead can be reduced.
  • the second information is used to indicate that the first data block is successfully decoded
  • the method further includes: when at least one of the M transport blocks is not channel-decoded correctly
  • the lower layer of the first communication device determines, according to the second information, that the response information of all hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) processes of the M transport blocks is an acknowledgment ACK.
  • HARQ hybrid automatic repeat request
  • the lower layer of the first communication device After the lower layer of the first communication device receives the second information, if the second information is used to indicate that the first data block has been successfully decoded, it can determine all HARQ processes of the M transport blocks
  • the response information is an acknowledgment ACK.
  • the second information is used to indicate successful decoding of the first data block, and the second information includes at least one of the M1 transport blocks used to transmit the K sub-blocks
  • the M1 transport blocks are transport blocks with correct channel decoding among the M transport blocks, and M1 is a positive integer.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device determines identifiers of the M transport blocks according to the identifier of at least one transport block among the M1 transport blocks.
  • the second information may include the identifier of at least one of the M1 transport blocks, so that the lower layer of the first communication device may determine the M transmission blocks according to the identifier of at least one of the M1 transport blocks.
  • the ID of the block may include the identifier of at least one of the M1 transport blocks, so that the lower layer of the first communication device may determine the M transmission blocks according to the identifier of at least one of the M1 transport blocks. The ID of the block.
  • the method before the upper layer of the first communication device sends the second information to the lower layer of the first communication device, the method further includes: the lower layer of the first communication device communicates A higher layer of the device sends third information, where the third information is used to indicate an identifier of at least one transport block in the M1 transport blocks.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device can report the identity of at least one transport block in the M1 transport blocks to the upper layer of the first communication device, and then the upper layer can learn the identity of at least one transport block in the M1 transport blocks.
  • the second information is used to indicate successful decoding of the first data block
  • the method further includes: the first communication device decodes the first data block according to the preset identifier and the logic corresponding to the first data block
  • the channel and/or wireless data bearer determines the identities of M transmission blocks, wherein the logical channel and/or wireless data bearer corresponding to the first data block is used to transmit the transmission block corresponding to the preset identifier, and the preset identifier includes M The ID of the transport block.
  • the N pieces of first control information are used to indicate identifiers of M transport blocks, and the identifiers of the M transport blocks belong to preset identifiers.
  • the relationship between the transport block identifier and the first data block can be established by binding the preset identifier to the serial channel and/or the wireless data bearer.
  • the first communication device determines the identifiers of the M transmission blocks according to the preset identifier and the logical channel and/or wireless data bearer corresponding to the first data block.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device acquires information of preset identifiers, where the information of preset identifiers includes: a start identifier, an end identifier, and a number of identifiers.
  • the identifier of the transport block is a HARQ process number of the transport block or an index of the transport block.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device stops receiving and/or stops decoding the information used to transmit the first data block a transport block; and/or, the first communication device stops receiving or stops monitoring second control information, where the second control information is used to instruct retransmission of at least one transport block in the M transport blocks.
  • the first communication device may stop receiving and/or stop decoding the transport block used to transmit the first data block; and/or, the first communication device may stop receiving Or stop monitoring the second control information, thereby saving overhead.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device receives X pieces of third control information, where the X pieces of third control information are used to indicate L transmission blocks, where X, L is a positive integer, and L is greater than or equal to X; the first communication device stops receiving and/or stops decoding transport blocks used to transmit the first data block, including: if L transport blocks and M transport blocks are used to transmit the same After a data block passes through one or more sub-blocks after the NC, the first communication device stops receiving and/or stops decoding L transmission blocks.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device receives first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure timers corresponding to HARQ processes of L transport blocks, wherein, the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of the L transport blocks is used to indicate the duration of a new transmission indicated by the physical control channel for the medium access control MAC entity, and/or, the timing corresponding to the HARQ process of the L transport blocks
  • the timer includes drx-InacvitityTimer.
  • the first communication device monitors the control information within the above duration (for example, the first communication device monitors the third control information within the above duration), if the first communication device monitors the control information within the duration, then the second A communication device restarts the timers corresponding to the HARQ processes of the L transport blocks.
  • the first communication device receives first configuration information, and the first configuration information is used to configure timers corresponding to HARQ processes of L transport blocks, where L The timer corresponding to the HARQ process of the transport block is used to indicate the start duration of the discontinuous reception DRX, and/or, the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of L transport blocks is drx-onDurationTimer.
  • the first communication device monitors the control information within the above duration, and if the first communication device monitors the control information within the duration (for example, the first communication device monitors the third control information within the above duration), then the second A communication device restarts the timers corresponding to the HARQ processes of the L transport blocks.
  • the first communication device stops receiving and/or stops decoding L transport blocks, including: the first communication device stops or closes the HARQ process corresponding to the L transport blocks timer.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device receives second configuration information, and the second configuration information is used to configure timers corresponding to HARQ processes of M transport blocks,
  • the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks is used to indicate the maximum duration of waiting for the retransmission corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks, and/or, the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks is drx -RetransmissionTimer.
  • the first communication device monitors the control information indicating (or called scheduling) the retransmission corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks within the above-mentioned maximum duration (for example, the first communication device monitors the first 2. Control information).
  • the first communication device receives second configuration information
  • the second configuration information is used to configure timers corresponding to HARQ processes of M transport blocks
  • the M transport blocks The timer corresponding to the HARQ process is used to indicate the minimum duration that the MAC entity expects to receive the HARQ retransmission allocation, and/or, the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks is drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer.
  • the first communication device stops receiving or stops monitoring the second control information
  • the method further includes: the first communication device stops or closes the HARQ process corresponding to the M transport blocks timer.
  • the method further includes: when the first data block is not successfully decoded, the first communication device starts the HARQ process of the retransmitted transport block among the M transport blocks the corresponding timer.
  • the first communication device starts a timer corresponding to the HARQ process of the retransmitted transport block in the M transport blocks, including: retransmitting in the M transport blocks In the next adjacent time unit after the timer drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer corresponding to the HARQ process of the transmission block of , the first communication device starts the timing corresponding to the HARQ process of the retransmitted transmission block among the M transmission blocks The device drx-RetransmissionTimer.
  • the first communication device may enable the retransmitted transport block among the M transport blocks according to the timeout of the timer drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer corresponding to the HARQ process of the retransmitted transport block among the M transport blocks
  • the timer drx-RetransmissionTimer corresponding to the HARQ process wherein, the first time unit at which drx-RetransmissionTimer is turned on is later than the second time unit at which drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer expires, and the first time unit is the same as the second time unit
  • the time units are adjacent.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device sends the fourth information, the fourth information is used to notify the second communication device whether to continue sending sub-blocks of the first data block.
  • the first communication device if the first data block is successfully decoded, the first communication device sends fourth information to the second communication device, and the fourth information is used to notify the second communication device The device stops sending sub-blocks of the first data block.
  • the first communication device sends fourth information to the second communication device, which is used for informing to stop sending the data of the first data block, so as to save air interface resources.
  • the fourth information includes an index and/or indication information of the first data block, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the fourth information includes information of other data blocks; or, The fourth information is used to indicate the number of transport blocks and/or sub-blocks still needed for decoding the first data block. For example: when the fourth information indicates that the number of transport blocks and/or sub-blocks still needed for decoding the first data block is 0, it means that the data of the first data block is no longer needed, that is, the second communication device can stop sending The data of the first data block.
  • the method further includes: the lower layer of the first communication device sending The upper layer sends K sub-blocks, and the K sub-blocks are the sub-blocks transmitted by the channel decoding correct transmission block among the M transmission blocks, and K is a positive integer; the upper layer of the first communication device decodes the first data block according to the K sub-block sum The number of required transport blocks and/or sub-blocks determines the value Q, which is the number of transport blocks and/or sub-blocks required to decode the first data block in addition to the K sub-blocks; the first communication device communicates to the second The device sends fifth information, where the fifth information is used to indicate the value Q.
  • the high layer of the first communication device is a radio link control RLC layer, a packet data convergence protocol PDCP layer, a media access control MAC layer or an NC layer; and/or,
  • the lower layer of the first communication device is the physical PHY layer.
  • N is an integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • a data transmission method which can be executed by a communication device, or can also be executed by a component (such as a chip or a circuit) of the communication device, which is not limited.
  • a component such as a chip or a circuit
  • the execution by the first communication device is taken as an example for description.
  • the method may include: the first communication device receives M transmission blocks from the second communication device, and the M transmission blocks are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block after network coding NC, where M is a positive integer ;
  • the lower layer of the first communication device sends K sub-blocks to the upper layer of the first communication device, and the K sub-blocks are the sub-blocks transmitted by the transport block with correct channel decoding among the M transport blocks, and K is a positive integer;
  • the first The upper layer of the communication device performs NC decoding on the K sub-blocks, and sends second information to the lower layer of the first communication device based on the NC decoding result, and the second information is used to indicate whether the first data block is successfully decoded.
  • the lower layer (such as the physical layer) of the first communication device receives M transmission blocks from the second communication device, and the M transmission blocks transmit one or more sub-blocks of the same data block after network coding; if the first The lower layer of a communication device correctly decodes M1 transport blocks among the M transport blocks, then the lower layer of the first communication device sends the K sub-blocks transmitted by the M1 transport blocks to the upper layer; if the upper layer of the first communication device passes K sub-blocks can successfully decode the first data block, then the upper layer of the first communication device can send notification information to the lower layer, and the lower layer can know that there is no need to perform operations related to the first data block according to the notification information, for example, there is no need to request M
  • the retransmission of the transport blocks other than the M1 transport blocks in the transport blocks for example, does not need to receive and/or decode the transport blocks used to transmit the first data block, and so on.
  • the upper layer of the first communication device fails to decode the first data block after receiving K sub-blocks
  • the upper layer of the first communication device can also send the lower layer Sending notification information
  • the lower layer can know that the first data block has not been successfully decoded or can know that the first data block has not been successfully decoded through K sub-blocks according to the notification information, and then the first communication device can continue to request the second communication device to transmit the first data A subblock of a block, or can perform operations such as normal retransmissions.
  • the second information is used to indicate successful decoding of the first data block
  • the method further includes: the first communication device sends feedback information to the second communication device, and the feedback information is used for It indicates that the transmission of the M transmission blocks is successful, or the feedback information is used to indicate that the transmission of the first data block is successful.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device receives N pieces of first control information, where the N pieces of first control information are used to indicate that M transmission blocks are used to transmit the first One or more sub-blocks after the data block passes through NC.
  • one or more of the first control information in the N pieces of first control information each include first information, and one of the one or more first control information includes The one or more pieces of first information are used to indicate that the M transmission blocks are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block passing through the NC, wherein the one or more pieces of first information meet a preset condition.
  • each of the N pieces of first control information includes first information, and the N pieces of first information included in the N pieces of first control information It is used to indicate that the M transmission blocks are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks after the first data block passes through the NC, where the values of the N pieces of first information are the same.
  • the second information is used to indicate that the first data block is successfully decoded
  • the method further includes: when at least one of the M transport blocks is not channel-decoded correctly
  • the lower layer of the first communication device determines, according to the second information, that the response information of all the HARQ processes of the M transport blocks is ACK.
  • the second information is used to indicate successful decoding of the first data block, and the second information includes at least one of the M1 transport blocks used to transmit the K sub-blocks
  • the M1 transport blocks are transport blocks with correct channel decoding among the M transport blocks, and M1 is a positive integer.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device determines identifiers of the M transport blocks according to the identifier of at least one transport block among the M1 transport blocks.
  • the method further includes: the lower layer of the first communication device communicates to the first A higher layer of the device sends third information, where the third information is used to indicate an identifier of at least one transport block in the M1 transport blocks.
  • the second information is used to indicate successful decoding of the first data block
  • the method further includes: the first communication device decodes the first data block according to the preset identifier and the logic corresponding to the first data block
  • the channel and/or wireless data bearer determines the identities of M transmission blocks, wherein the logical channel and/or wireless data bearer corresponding to the first data block is used to transmit the transmission block corresponding to the preset identifier, and the preset identifier includes M The ID of the transport block.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device acquires preset identifier information, where the preset identifier information includes: a start identifier, an end identifier, and a number of identifiers.
  • the identification is the HARQ process number of the transport block or the index of the transport block.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device stops receiving and/or stops decoding the information used to transmit the first data block a transport block; and/or, the first communication device stops receiving or stops monitoring second control information, where the second control information is used to instruct retransmission of at least one transport block in the M transport blocks.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device receives X pieces of third control information, where the X pieces of third control information are used to indicate L transmission blocks, where X, L is a positive integer, and L is greater than or equal to X; the first communication device stops receiving and/or stops decoding transmission blocks used to transmit the first data block, including: if L transmission blocks and M transmission blocks are used to transmit the first data block After a data block passes through one or more sub-blocks after the NC, the first communication device stops receiving and/or stops decoding L transmission blocks.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device receives first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure timers corresponding to HARQ processes of L transport blocks, The timer corresponding to the HARQ process of the L transport blocks is used to indicate the duration after the physical control channel indicates a new transmission for the medium access control MAC entity, and/or, the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of the L transport blocks is drx-InacvitityTimer.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device receives first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure timers corresponding to HARQ processes of L transport blocks, The timer corresponding to the HARQ process of L transport blocks is used to indicate the duration of discontinuous reception DRX, and/or, the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of L transport blocks is drx-onDurationTimer.
  • the first communication device stops receiving and/or stops decoding L transport blocks, including: the first communication device stops or closes the HARQ process corresponding to the L transport blocks timer.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device receives second configuration information, and the second configuration information is used to configure timers corresponding to HARQ processes of M transport blocks, The timer corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks is used to indicate the maximum duration of waiting for the retransmission corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks, and/or, the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks includes drx -RetransmissionTimer.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device receives second configuration information, and the second configuration information is used to configure timers corresponding to HARQ processes of M transport blocks,
  • the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks is used to indicate the minimum duration for which the MAC entity expects to receive the HARQ retransmission allocation, and/or, the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks includes drx-HARQ-RTT- Timer.
  • the first communication device stops receiving or stops monitoring the second control information, including: the first communication device stops or closes the timing corresponding to the HARQ process of M transmission blocks device.
  • the method further includes: if the first data block is not successfully decoded, the first communication device starts the HARQ process corresponding to the retransmitted transport block among the M transport blocks timer.
  • the first communication device starts a timer corresponding to the HARQ process of the retransmitted transport block in the M transport blocks, including: retransmitting in the M transport blocks In the next adjacent time unit after the timer drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer corresponding to the HARQ process of the transmission block of , the first communication device starts the timing corresponding to the HARQ process of the retransmitted transmission block among the M transmission blocks The device drx-RetransmissionTimer.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device sends fourth information to the second communication device, and the fourth information is used to notify the second communication device whether to continue sending the first data Subblocks of the block.
  • the fourth information includes an index of the first data block and/or indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the fourth information includes information of other data blocks; or, The fourth information is used to indicate the number of transport blocks and/or sub-blocks required for decoding the first data block.
  • the method further includes: the upper layer of the first communication device determines according to the K sub-blocks and the number of transport blocks and/or sub-blocks required to decode the first data block The value Q, the value Q is the number of transmission blocks and/or sub-blocks required to decode the first data block in addition to the K sub-blocks; the first communication device sends fifth information to the second communication device, and the fifth information is used to indicate the value Q.
  • the high layer of the first communication device is a radio link control RLC layer, a packet data convergence protocol PDCP layer, a media access control MAC layer or an NC layer; and/or,
  • the lower layer of the first communication device is the physical PHY layer.
  • N is an integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • a data transmission method is provided, and the method may be executed by a communication device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a chip or a circuit) of the communication device, which is not limited.
  • a component such as a chip or a circuit
  • the execution by the first communication device is taken as an example for description.
  • the method may include: the first communication device receives M transmission blocks from the second communication device, and the M transmission blocks are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block after network coding NC, where M is a positive integer ; The first communication device determines that the channel decoding of the M1 transport blocks in the M transport blocks is correct, and the first data block is successfully decoded after the K sub-blocks are decoded by NC, and the K sub-blocks are transmitted by the M1 transport blocks Sub-block, M1 is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1 and less than M, and K is a positive integer; the first communication device determines that the response information of all HARQ processes of M transport blocks is ACK, or the first communication device sends a message to the second The communication device sends feedback information; wherein, the feedback information is used to indicate successful transmission of the M transmission blocks, or the feedback information is used to indicate successful transmission of the first data block.
  • the first communication device receives M transmission blocks from the second communication device, and the M transmission blocks transmit one or more sub-blocks of the same data block after network encoding; if the M transmission blocks The channel decoding of the M1 transport blocks is correct, and the K sub-blocks transmitted by the M1 transport blocks can successfully decode the first data block, then the first communication device determines the responses of all HARQ processes of the M transport blocks.
  • the information is ACK, even if the channel decoding of the transport blocks other than the M1 transport blocks among the M transport blocks is incorrect, an affirmative response is also performed, and there is no need to request the information of the transport blocks other than the M1 transport blocks among the M transport blocks Retransmission. In this way, the waste of air interface resources can be reduced, and the power consumption overhead can be reduced.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device receives N pieces of first control information, where the N pieces of first control information are used to indicate M transport blocks, and the N pieces of first The control information is used to indicate that the M transmission blocks are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block after passing through the NC.
  • one or more of the first control information in the N pieces of first control information each include first information, and one of the one or more first control information includes The one or more pieces of first information are used to indicate that the M transmission blocks are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block passing through the NC, wherein the one or more pieces of first information meet a preset condition.
  • each of the N pieces of first control information includes first information, and the N pieces of first information included in the N pieces of first control information It is used to indicate that M transmission blocks are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block after passing through the NC, where the values of the N pieces of first information are the same.
  • the first communication device determines that the response information of all HARQ processes of the M transmission blocks is ACK, including: the first communication device determines the M transmission blocks according to the second information The response information of all HARQ processes of the block is ACK.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device stops receiving and/or stops decoding the transmission block used to transmit the first data block; and/or, the first communication device Stop receiving or stop monitoring the second control information, the second control information is used to indicate the retransmission of at least one transport block in the M transport blocks; wherein, the K sub-blocks are transport blocks with correct channel decoding among the M transport blocks The transmitted sub-block, K is a positive integer.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device receives X pieces of third control information, where the X pieces of third control information are used to indicate L transmission blocks, where X, L is a positive integer, and L is greater than or equal to X; the first communication device stops receiving and/or stops decoding transmission blocks used to transmit the first data block, including: if L transmission blocks and M transmission blocks are used to transmit the first data block After a data block passes through one or more sub-blocks after the NC, the first communication device stops receiving and/or stops decoding L transmission blocks.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device receives first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure timers corresponding to HARQ processes of L transport blocks, The timer corresponding to the HARQ process of the L transport blocks is used to indicate the duration after the physical control channel indicates a new transmission for the medium access control MAC entity, and/or, the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of the L transport blocks is drx-InacvitityTimer.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device receives first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure timers corresponding to HARQ processes of L transport blocks, The timer corresponding to the HARQ process of L transport blocks is used to indicate the duration of discontinuous reception DRX, and/or, the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of L transport blocks is drx-onDurationTimer.
  • the first communication device stops receiving and/or stops decoding L transport blocks, including: the first communication device stops or closes the HARQ process corresponding to the L transport blocks timer.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device receives second configuration information, and the second configuration information is used to configure timers corresponding to HARQ processes of M transport blocks, The timer corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks is used to indicate the maximum duration of waiting for the retransmission corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks, and/or, the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks includes drx -RetransmissionTimer.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device receives second configuration information, and the second configuration information is used to configure timers corresponding to HARQ processes of M transport blocks,
  • the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks is used to indicate the minimum duration for which the MAC entity expects to receive the HARQ retransmission allocation, and/or, the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks includes drx-HARQ-RTT- Timer.
  • the first communication device stops receiving or stops monitoring the second control information, including: the first communication device stops or closes the timing corresponding to the HARQ process of M transmission blocks device.
  • the method further includes: when the first data block is not successfully decoded, the first communication device starts the HARQ process of the retransmitted transport block among the M transport blocks the corresponding timer.
  • the first communication device starts a timer corresponding to the HARQ process of the retransmitted transport block in the M transport blocks, including: retransmitting in the M transport blocks In the next adjacent time unit after the timer drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer corresponding to the HARQ process of the transmission block of , the first communication device starts the timing corresponding to the HARQ process of the retransmitted transmission block among the M transmission blocks The device drx-RetransmissionTimer.
  • the method further includes: the first communication device sends fourth information to the second communication device, and the fourth information is used to notify the second communication device whether to continue sending the first data Subblocks of the block.
  • the fourth information includes an index and/or indication information of the first data block, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the fourth information includes information of other data blocks; or, The fourth information is used to indicate the number of transport blocks and/or sub-blocks required for decoding the first data block.
  • the method further includes: the lower layer of the first communication device sends K sub-blocks to the upper layer of the first communication device, K The sub-blocks are the sub-blocks transmitted by the transport block with correct channel decoding among the M transport blocks, and K is a positive integer; the upper layer of the first communication device is based on the K sub-blocks and the transport block required for decoding the first data block and/or Or the number of sub-blocks determines the value Q, and the value Q is the transport block and/or the number of sub-blocks needed to decode the first data block in addition to the K sub-blocks; the first communication device sends the fifth message to the second communication device, the first communication device Five information is used to indicate the value Q.
  • N is an integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • a data transmission method is provided, and the method may be executed by a communication device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a chip or a circuit) of the communication device, which is not limited.
  • a component such as a chip or a circuit
  • the execution by the second communication device is taken as an example for description.
  • the method may include: the second communication device sends N pieces of first control information to the first communication device, the N pieces of first control information are used to indicate M transmission blocks, and the N pieces of first control information are also used to indicate M transmission blocks It is used to transmit one or more sub-blocks after network coding NC of the first data block, where N and M are positive integers, and M is greater than or equal to N; the second communication device sends M transmission blocks to the first communication device.
  • one or more pieces of first control information in the N pieces of first control information each include first information, and the first information included in the one or more pieces of first control information
  • One piece of information is used to indicate that the M transmission blocks are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block after passing through the NC, wherein one or more pieces of first information satisfy a preset condition.
  • each of the N pieces of first control information includes first information, and the N pieces of first information included in the N pieces of first control information It is used to indicate that the M transmission blocks are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks after the first data block passes through the NC, where the values of the N pieces of first information are the same.
  • the method further includes: the second communication device receives fourth information from the first communication device, and the fourth information is used to notify the second communication device whether to continue sending the first A subblock of a data block.
  • the fourth information includes an index and/or indication information of the first data block, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the fourth information includes information of other data blocks; or, The fourth information is used to indicate the number of transport blocks and/or sub-blocks required for decoding the first data block.
  • the method further includes: the second communication device receives fifth information from the first communication device , the fifth information is used to indicate the value Q, the value Q is the transport block and/or the number of sub-blocks required to decode the first data block in addition to the K sub-blocks, and the K sub-blocks are the correct channel decoding of the M transport blocks
  • the sub-block transmitted by the transmission block, K is a positive integer.
  • a device for data transmission is provided, and the device is configured to execute the method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the fourth aspect above.
  • the apparatus may include a unit and/or module for executing the method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the fourth aspect, such as a processing unit and/or a communication unit.
  • the apparatus is a communication device (such as a first communication device, or a second communication device).
  • the communication unit may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface; the processing unit may be at least one processor.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • the apparatus is a chip, a chip system, or a circuit for a communication device (such as a first communication device, or a second communication device).
  • the communication unit may be an input/output interface, interface circuit, output circuit, input circuit, pin or related circuit on the chip, chip system or circuit, etc.
  • the processing unit may be at least one processor, processing circuit or logic circuit, etc.
  • a device for data transmission comprising: at least one processor configured to execute a computer program or instruction stored in a memory, so as to implement any of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the fourth aspect above.
  • the apparatus further includes a memory for storing computer programs or instructions.
  • the device further includes a communication interface, through which the processor reads the computer program or instructions stored in the memory.
  • the apparatus is a communication device (such as a first communication device, or a second communication device).
  • the apparatus is a chip, a chip system, or a circuit for a communication device (such as a first communication device, or a second communication device).
  • the present application provides a processor configured to execute the methods provided in the first aspect to the fourth aspect above.
  • the processor's output and reception, input and other operations can also be understood as the sending and receiving operations performed by the radio frequency circuit and the antenna, which is not limited in this application.
  • a computer-readable storage medium where the computer-readable medium stores program code for execution by a device, and the program code includes any one of the possible implementation manners for performing the above-mentioned first aspect to the fourth aspect. method.
  • a computer program product including instructions is provided, and when the computer program product is run on a computer, the computer is made to execute the method in any possible implementation manner of the above first aspect to the fourth aspect.
  • a communication system including the aforementioned first communication device and second communication device.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication system 100 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication system 200 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of an 8D2U time slot configuration.
  • Fig. 4 shows a schematic diagram of the HARQ process under the incremental redundancy scheme.
  • Fig. 5 shows a schematic diagram of the DRX mechanism.
  • Fig. 6 shows another schematic diagram of the DRX mechanism.
  • Fig. 7 shows another schematic diagram of the DRX mechanism.
  • Fig. 8 shows another schematic diagram of the DRX mechanism.
  • Fig. 9 shows a schematic diagram of a network coding method.
  • Figure 10 shows a schematic diagram of the network coding function.
  • FIG. 11 shows a schematic diagram of data transmission after network encoding.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a data transmission method 1200 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a data transmission method 1300 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of network coding feedback based on an RLC layer provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 15 is a schematic diagram of fourth information provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of a data transmission method 1600 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 17 is a schematic block diagram of a data transmission device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 18 is a schematic block diagram of another data transmission device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 19 is a schematic block diagram of another data transmission device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the technical solution provided by this application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: the fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) or new radio (new radio, NR) system, long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) system, LTE frequency division Duplex (frequency division duplex, FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (time division duplex, TDD) system, etc.
  • 5G fifth generation
  • NR new radio
  • long term evolution long term evolution
  • LTE long term evolution
  • LTE frequency division Duplex frequency division duplex
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD time division duplex
  • 6G sixth generation
  • the technical solution provided by this application can also be applied to device to device (device to device, D2D) communication, vehicle to everything (vehicle-to-everything, V2X) communication, machine to machine (machine to machine, M2M) communication, machine type Communication (machine type communication, MTC), and Internet of things (internet of things, IoT) communication system or other communication systems.
  • D2D device to device
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • M2M machine to machine
  • M2M machine type Communication
  • MTC machine type communication
  • IoT Internet of things
  • the terminal equipment in the embodiment of the present application may also be referred to as user equipment (user equipment, UE), access terminal, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal , communication device, wireless communication device, user agent, or user device.
  • user equipment user equipment
  • UE user equipment
  • access terminal subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal , communication device, wireless communication device, user agent, or user device.
  • a terminal device may be a device that provides voice/data to a user, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and the like.
  • examples of some terminals are: mobile phone (mobile phone), tablet computer, notebook computer, palmtop computer, mobile internet device (mobile internet device, MID), wearable device, virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) device, augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) equipment, mixed reality (mix reality, MR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control (industrial control), wireless terminals in self-driving (self driving) or intelligent driving, remote medical surgery (remote medical surgery) ), wireless terminals in smart grid, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart city, wireless terminals in smart home, Cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (PDAs), handheld devices with wireless communication capabilities, Computing devices or other processing devices connected to a wireless modem, wearable devices, terminal devices in a 5G network or
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices, which is a general term for the application of wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a hardware device, but also achieve powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • Generalized wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, etc., and only focus on a certain type of application functions, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones Use, such as various smart bracelets and smart jewelry for physical sign monitoring.
  • the device for realizing the function of the terminal device may be the terminal device, or may be a device capable of supporting the terminal device to realize the function, such as a chip system or a chip, and the device may be installed in the terminal device.
  • the system-on-a-chip may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the network device in this embodiment of the present application may be a device for communicating with a terminal device, and the network device may also be called an access network device or a wireless access network device, for example, the network device may be a base station.
  • the network device in this embodiment of the present application may refer to a radio access network (radio access network, RAN) node (or device) that connects a terminal device to a wireless network.
  • radio access network radio access network, RAN node (or device) that connects a terminal device to a wireless network.
  • the base station can broadly cover various names in the following, or replace with the following names, such as: node B (NodeB), evolved base station (evolved NodeB, eNB), next generation base station (next generation NodeB, gNB), relay station, Access point, transmission point (transmitting and receiving point, TRP), transmitting point (transmitting point, TP), primary station, secondary station, multi-standard wireless (motor slide retainer, MSR) node, home base station, network controller, access point Ingress node, wireless node, access point (access point, AP), transmission node, transceiver node, baseband unit (baseband unit, BBU), remote radio unit (remote radio unit, RRU), active antenna unit (active antenna) unit, AAU), radio head (remote radio head, RRH), central unit (central unit, CU), distributed unit (distributed unit, DU), positioning nodes, etc.
  • NodeB node B
  • eNB evolved base station
  • next generation NodeB g
  • a base station may be a macro base station, a micro base station, a relay node, a donor node, or the like, or a combination thereof.
  • a base station may also refer to a communication module, modem or chip used to be set in the aforementioned equipment or device.
  • the base station can also be a mobile switching center, a device that assumes the function of a base station in D2D, V2X, and M2M communications, a network-side device in a 6G network, and a device that assumes the function of a base station in a future communication system.
  • Base stations can support networks of the same or different access technologies. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the network device.
  • Base stations can be fixed or mobile.
  • a helicopter or drone can be configured to act as a mobile base station, and one or more cells can move according to the location of the mobile base station.
  • a helicopter or drone may be configured to serve as a device in communication with another base station.
  • the network device mentioned in the embodiment of the present application may be a device including CU, or DU, or a device including CU and DU, or a control plane CU node (central unit-control plane, CU -CP)) and the user plane CU node (central unit-user plane (CU-UP) of the user plane) and the equipment of the DU node.
  • CU central unit-control plane
  • CU-UP central unit-user plane
  • Network equipment and terminal equipment can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, hand-held or vehicle-mounted; they can also be deployed on water; they can also be deployed on aircraft, balloons and satellites in the air.
  • the scenarios where the network device and the terminal device are located are not limited.
  • Fig. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a wireless communication system 100 applicable to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the wireless communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 110 shown in Figure 1, and the wireless communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal device 120 shown in Figure 1 .
  • Both the network device and the terminal device can be configured with multiple antennas, and the network device and the terminal device can communicate using the multi-antenna technology.
  • the network device when the network device communicates with the terminal device, the network device may manage one or more cells, and there may be an integer number of terminal devices in one cell.
  • the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 form a single-cell communication system, and the cell is denoted as cell #1 without loss of generality.
  • the network device 110 may be a network device in cell #1, or, the network device 110 may serve a terminal device (such as the terminal device 120) in cell #1.
  • a cell may be understood as an area within the wireless signal coverage of the network device.
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic diagram of a wireless communication system 200 applicable to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the wireless communication system 200 includes multiple terminal devices, such as terminal device 121 to terminal device 123 in FIG. 2 .
  • the terminal device 121 to the terminal device 123 can communicate directly.
  • the terminal device 121 and the terminal device 122 may send data to the terminal device 123 individually or simultaneously.
  • FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are only simplified schematic diagrams for ease of understanding.
  • the wireless communication system 100 or the wireless communication system 200 may also include other network devices or other terminal devices. be drawn.
  • the embodiments of the present application may be applicable to any communication scenario in which a sending-end device communicates with a receiving-end device.
  • Time-frequency resources may include one or more time domain units (or, may also be referred to as time units).
  • a time domain unit may be a symbol, or a mini-slot, or a slot, or a subframe, and so on.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of an 8D2U time slot configuration.
  • the schematic diagram of the time slot ratio can be used, for example, in a scenario where time division duplex (time division duplex, TDD) is used in a cellular network.
  • the time slot configuration shown in FIG. 3 may be the time slot configuration when the sub-carrier spacing (sub-carrier spacing, SCS) is 30 kHz.
  • D represents a downlink time slot, and the downlink time slot is used for downlink transmission;
  • U represents an uplink time slot, and the uplink time slot is used for uplink transmission.
  • the time slot ratio of 8D2U means that 10 time slots are used as a cycle, which includes 8 downlink time slots and 2 uplink time slots.
  • the feedback information is transmitted in an uplink time slot.
  • the feedback information of the terminal device can be transmitted in the following time slots: U00 time slot, U01 time slot, U10 time slot, and U11 time slot.
  • U00 time slot U01 time slot
  • U10 time slot U11 time slot.
  • the feedback information of the data can be reported to the network device through the U00 time slot or U01 time slot; if the data transmitted in the D11 time slot If the data transmission fails, then the data feedback information can be reported to the network device through the U10 time slot or the U11 time slot.
  • the data transmitted in the D05 time slot may have a retransmission scheduling opportunity, that is, the network device may schedule retransmission of the data in the D10-D17 time slot.
  • the data transmitted in the D11 time slot has no opportunity for retransmission scheduling, that is, the retransmission data scheduled by the network device for D11 has exceeded the air interface delay requirement (for example, 10ms).
  • FIG. 3 is an exemplary illustration, and this embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • data can be transmitted on a physical sidelink share channel (PSSCH), and feedback information can be transmitted on a physical sidelink feedback channel (physical sidelink feedback channel).
  • PSFCH physical sidelink feedback channel
  • PSFCH may be transmitted periodically. For example, if the period of the PSFCH is 0, it means that there is no feedback; if the period is P (P is an integer greater than or equal to 1), it means that a PSFCH will appear every P time slots.
  • P is an integer greater than or equal to 1
  • Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ)
  • HARQ is a retransmission mechanism that combines forward error correction code (forward error correction, FEC) and automatic repeat request (automatic repeat request, ARQ).
  • FEC forward error correction
  • ARQ automatic repeat request
  • FEC It is an error control method, which means that before the signal is sent to the transmission channel, the sending end performs encoding processing according to the algorithm in advance, adding redundant code with the characteristics of the signal itself; the receiving end decodes the received signal according to the corresponding algorithm , so as to find out the error code generated in the transmission process and correct it.
  • ARQ It means that the receiving end judges whether the received data is correct through the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) check information, and feeds back the judgment result to the sending end; if the receiving end is wrong, the sending end receives the feedback information Then resend the data until the receiving end receives it correctly.
  • CRC cyclic redundancy check
  • the HARQ mechanism uses the FEC algorithm to encode the channel, that is, to add an FEC code with error detection and error correction capabilities to the transmitted information, and the FEC code can be called redundant information.
  • the receiving end decodes the received information according to the corresponding algorithm, and if an error code is found in the transmission process, the error code is corrected. If it can be corrected, the receiving end receives it correctly (that is, the data transmission is successful); if it cannot be corrected, the ARQ mechanism is used to request the sending end to retransmit the data; if the data is retransmitted, and the reception error is still received, then request retransmission again until it is received so far.
  • the HARQ mechanism using FEC technology, can restore damaged data without retransmitting data, but if FEC technology is only used to achieve high transmission efficiency, this will greatly increase the computational overhead and complexity of the encoding and decoding process, so The combination of FEC technology and ARQ technology complements each other, and can better improve transmission efficiency. Therefore, compared with simply using the FEC technology, using the HARQ mechanism can reduce the complexity and calculation overhead of the encoding and decoding process.
  • Soft combining means the receiving end saves the received error data packet in a HARQ buffer (buffer), and merges it with the subsequent received retransmission data packet, and then decodes the merged data packet, if it is still If the decoding fails, retransmission is requested, and data packets are merged to obtain a more reliable data packet than decoding alone.
  • Two kinds of gains can be obtained through soft combining: 1) signal energy gain obtained when retransmitting the same coded bits, and 2) coding gain obtained by sending extra parity bits during retransmission.
  • soft combining can also be divided into chase combining (CC) and incremental redundancy (IR).
  • CC chase combining
  • IR incremental redundancy
  • the sender In chase combining, the sender adds CRC to the original information bits to generate a coded bit set through encoding, and sends this coded bit set regardless of initial transmission or retransmission.
  • the bit information of each retransmission is the same as the bit information of the initial transmission, which can improve the signal-to-noise ratio.
  • the bit information of each retransmission can be different from the bit information of the initial transmission.
  • the sender can generate multiple coded bit sets, each of which carries the same information. Whenever a retransmission is required, a different coded bit set than the previous one is usually transmitted, and the receiving end will combine the retransmitted data with the previous transmitted data.
  • the coded bit set for each retransmission may be called a redundancy version (Redundancy Version, RV).
  • RV redundancy Version
  • the sender sends additional redundant information through retransmissions. As the number of retransmissions increases, redundant information accumulates, thereby obtaining better decoding results.
  • the HARQ process may employ a stop-and-wait protocol to transmit data.
  • the stop-waiting protocol means that the sender waits for confirmation information after sending a transport block (TB); the receiver can use 1-bit information to make a positive acknowledgment (ACK) or negative acknowledgment (negative acknowledgment, NACK); the receiving end sends the next TB after receiving the ACK.
  • ACK may indicate that the TB is successfully received and the TB is successfully decoded;
  • NACK may indicate that the TB is not successfully received, or the TB is not successfully decoded.
  • Fig. 4 shows a schematic diagram of the HARQ process under the incremental redundancy scheme.
  • the sending end sends ⁇ TB0, RV0 ⁇ to the receiving end, ⁇ TB0, RV0 ⁇ indicates that the transmitted transport block is TB0, and the redundancy version is RV0; the receiving end decodes ⁇ TB0, RV0 ⁇ ; the receiving end It is determined whether the feedback information of TBO is ACK or NACK according to the receiving situation of TBO.
  • the receiving end successfully receives and decodes TB0, it will send ACK to the sending end, and after receiving the ACK from the receiving end, the sending end will send ⁇ TB1, RV0 ⁇ to the receiving end; if the receiving end fails to receive or decode TB0, send NACK to the sender, and send ⁇ TB0, RV1 ⁇ to the receiver after receiving the NACK from the receiver.
  • FIG. 4 is an illustration by taking the solution of incremental redundancy as an example. It should be noted that in the chasing and merging scheme, there is no concept of RV, so each retransmission is the initial data transmission. For example, the sending end sends TB0 to the receiving end. If the receiving end fails to receive or decode, it returns NACK to the sending end. After receiving the NACK, the sending end sends TB0 to the receiving end again. This TB0 is consistent with the initial transmission TB0.
  • the terminal device sends feedback information according to the time indicated by the network device.
  • the network device can control the time to send the HARQ feedback information through the HARQ feedback timing field (such as k1) of the downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI), where k1 can identify the physical downlink shared channel (physical downlink share channel, PDSCH) data and the time slot offset value between the terminal equipment sending HARQ feedback information.
  • k1 can identify the physical downlink shared channel (physical downlink share channel, PDSCH) data and the time slot offset value between the terminal equipment sending HARQ feedback information.
  • the terminal device receives PDSCH data in n time slots, then the terminal device sends the HARQ feedback information of the PDSCH in (n+k1) time slots.
  • the HARQ feedback information may be carried on a physical uplink control channel (physical uplink control channel, PUCCH) or a physical uplink shared channel (physical uplink share channel, PUSCH).
  • the HARQ process number may also be referred to as a HARQ process identifier (identifier, ID).
  • ID HARQ process identifier
  • a HARQ process number can be used to uniquely specify a HARQ process.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device performs channel coding on the TB, it can store the data obtained by channel coding in the HARQ buffer and wait for transmission.
  • the TB in the HARQ buffer can have a one-to-one correspondence with the HARQ process, and each TB can correspond to one HARQ process.
  • multiple references to the HARQ process of the TB or the HARQ process of the data have the same meaning, and they are all used to indicate the HARQ process corresponding to the TB.
  • the HARQ process of multiple TBs mentioned in the following embodiments means the HARQ process corresponding to each TB in the multiple TBs, that is, the multiple HARQ processes corresponding to the multiple TBs.
  • DRX It can realize that the terminal equipment is in the sleep state (sleep mode) periodically, and does not need to monitor the physical downlink control channel (physical downlink control channel, PDCCH) in the sleep state, and monitors the PDCCH when it is in the wake up state, so that it can Make the terminal equipment achieve the purpose of power saving.
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • the implementation of the DRX mechanism is different when the terminal device is in the idle state and the connected state.
  • the DRX described below refers to the DRX used when the terminal device is in the connected state, that is, connected DRX (connected DRX, C-DRX).
  • Fig. 5 shows a schematic diagram of the DRX mechanism.
  • the period marked “drx-onDurationTimer” indicates the time when the terminal device monitors the PDCCH, during which the terminal device is in the wake-up state; the period marked “Opportunity for DRX (Opportunity for DRX)” indicates The time during which the terminal device does not need to monitor the PDCCH, during this period, the terminal device is in a sleep state.
  • the longer the "Opportunity for DRX" time the lower the power consumption of terminal equipment, but correspondingly, the delay of service transmission will also increase.
  • the period during which the terminal equipment monitors the PDCCH may be referred to as a DRX active period, and the period during which the terminal equipment does not monitor the PDCCH may be referred to as a DRX dormancy period or a DRX sleep period.
  • the terminal equipment continuously monitors the PDCCH.
  • the DRX OnDuration may use the following timers: drx-onDurationTimer, drx-InactivityTimer, drx-RetransmissionTimer.
  • drx-onDurationTimer and drx-InactivityTimer represent timers related to the monitoring of the PDCCH by the terminal equipment. As shown in FIG. 5, during the operation of drx-onDurationTimer, the terminal equipment is in the wake-up state. drx-RetransmissionTimer indicates a timer related to retransmission. The following descriptions will be made respectively in conjunction with FIG. 6 to FIG. 8 .
  • Fig. 6 shows another schematic diagram of the DRX mechanism.
  • the terminal device is in the wake-up state.
  • the terminal device In the last subframe of the network device during the running of drx-onDurationTimer (for example, it is recorded as subframe 0), there is a large byte of data that needs to be sent to the terminal device, and the data cannot be sent to the terminal device in subframe 0. All frames are sent. If the DRX mechanism shown in Figure 5 is followed, the terminal device will enter the sleep state in the 1st subframe and will not receive PDSCH data from the network device. The network device needs to wait until the end of the DRX cycle and continue when drx-onDurationTimer is running.
  • the above processing mechanism increases the data transmission delay.
  • drx-InactivityTimer is added to the DRX mechanism .
  • the principle of the drx-InactivityTimer mechanism is: within the On Duration time when the terminal device enters the DRX activation period, when the terminal device schedules the first uplink or downlink data transmission, the network device can start or restart a timer drx-InactivityTimer, and the terminal device will always In the wake-up state until the drx-InactivityTimer times out (or ends).
  • the terminal device continues to monitor the PDCCH until the drx-InactivityTimer times out.
  • the data transmission delay can be reduced.
  • Fig. 7 shows another schematic diagram of the DRX mechanism.
  • the terminal device will continue to monitor the PDCCH until the drx-InactivityTimer times out.
  • Fig. 8 shows another schematic diagram of the DRX mechanism.
  • the timers related to retransmission at least include: drx-RetransmissionTimer and drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer.
  • the timer drx-RetransmissionTimer can also be described as: drx-RetransmissionTimerDL.
  • the timer drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer may also be described as: drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerDL.
  • drx-RetransmissionTimer and drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer are used for description.
  • the terminal device can assume that the TB may not be retransmitted until after the drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer, so when the drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer is running, the terminal device does not need to Monitor PDCCH.
  • the terminal device starts a drx-RetransmissionTimer for the HARQ process.
  • drx-RetransmissionTimer can indicate the maximum time that the terminal device waits for retransmission.
  • the terminal device monitors the PDCCH for retransmission.
  • NC Network coding
  • network coding can be regarded as a manner of coding data to be transmitted.
  • the sending end can perform network coding on the data packet to be transmitted to generate an extra redundant packet, and the receiving end receives the data packet and the extra redundant packet, and recovers the lost data by decoding the network coding.
  • the network coding mentioned in the embodiment of this application can be any kind of coding with erasure correction function.
  • the receiving end can recover the lost data by decoding the network coding (or called NC decoding).
  • Fig. 9 shows a schematic diagram of a network coding method.
  • a network coding block (or a data block) includes A network coding packets (or also called network coding sub-blocks, or sub-blocks), where A is a positive integer.
  • a network code packet contains several bits of data, and each network code contains the same number of bits.
  • a network coding packet containing data block data may be referred to as a network coding data packet, or a network coding system packet.
  • Performing network coding on A network coding data packets can generate B network coding redundant packets, where B is a positive integer.
  • each network coding redundancy packet is the same as that of the network coding data packet, that is, the number of bits contained in each network coding redundancy packet is the same as the number of bits contained in the network coding data packet.
  • B may be a predefined or preconfigured fixed value, or may be infinite.
  • B is infinite, which can be understood as the value of B has no upper limit.
  • B can be considered that the sending end has been sending the data of the network coding block until it receives the confirmation information fed back by the receiving end, and stops sending the data of the network coding block.
  • the foregoing network coding data packet may also be referred to as a data packet for short, and the network coding redundant packet may also be referred to as a redundant packet for short.
  • the receiving end may not receive all packets encoded by the network correctly. As shown in FIG. 9 , after being transmitted over the air interface, some network coding packets in the network coding block are not received correctly. However, because the receiving end receives a certain amount of network coded redundant packets, the network coded data packets that failed to be transmitted can be recovered by decoding the network codes.
  • an XR frame can be regarded as a network coding block, and the XR frame is divided into multiple network coding packets, and network coding is performed between these network coding packets to generate redundant packets.
  • the receiving end After air interface transmission, after receiving a certain number (such as A) of the above-mentioned (A+B) network coding packets, the receiving end can recover the network coding packets that failed to be transmitted by decoding the network coding. This enables complete transmission of XR frames.
  • the probability that the corresponding network coding block can be recovered is about 99%; when the receiving end receives (A+ After any (A+1) network coding packets in B), the probability that the corresponding network coding block can be recovered is about 99.99%; when the receiving end receives any (A+2) network coding packets in (A+B) , corresponding to a probability of about 99.9999% that the network coding block can be recovered.
  • network coding functionality may be placed in a higher layer, ie a layer above the physical layer.
  • a network coding function is added to an existing high layer, such as a network coding function is added to a radio link control protocol (radio link control, RLC) layer.
  • RLC radio link control
  • a new protocol layer (or function layer) is added, and the newly added protocol layer is used to realize the network coding function.
  • Figure 10 shows a schematic diagram of the network coding function.
  • the network coding function is added in the RLC layer, that is, the network coding function can be embedded in the RLC layer, that is to say, the network coding function is implemented in the RLC layer, which is not limited, for example, A network coding function may also be added in a packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer or a media access control (media access control, MAC) layer.
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • MAC media access control
  • a protocol layer is added for the network coding function, such as denoted as NC layer.
  • the NC layer may be located between the PDCP layer and the RLC layer.
  • the NC layer may be located between the RLC layer and the MAC layer.
  • the data of the RLC layer not only performs some operations of the RLC layer, but also performs network coding operations as shown in FIG. 9 .
  • an RLC service data unit (service data unit, SDU) can be used as a network coding block, and the RLC SDU includes multiple network coding packets, that is, the RLC SDU is segmented into multiple network coding packets; for another example, each RLC SDU can be used as a network coding packet, and multiple RLC SDUs form a network coding block.
  • the RLC layer can send the network coded data to the MAC layer through a logical channel, and the MAC layer can multiplex multiple different RLC data into a MAC layer protocol data unit (protocol data unit, PDU) .
  • PDU MAC layer protocol data unit
  • FIG. 11 shows a schematic diagram of data transmission after network encoding.
  • the terminal device starts decoding after receiving the network coding packet in the D03 time slot. It is assumed that the terminal device can successfully decode the network coding block based on the received network coding packet. However, because the network coding packet transmitted in the D02 time slot is decoded incorrectly at the physical layer, the terminal device starts the drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer after reporting a NACK in the U time slot.
  • drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer After drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer times out, start drx-RetransmissionTimer, and the terminal device monitors the control information for retransmission during the running of drx-RetransmissionTimer. In this way, not only does it not help the decoding of the network coding block, but it will wake up the terminal device that was originally in the sleep state, increasing the power consumption of the terminal device, and the sending end schedules the retransmission of data, resulting in a waste of air interface resources.
  • This application proposes a solution.
  • the higher layer notifies the physical layer, so that the physical layer can no longer perform operations related to the network coding block, such as stopping receiving and/or Stop decoding the network coding packets of the network coding block, or stop performing operations related to retransmission, so as to reduce the waste of air interface resources and power consumption.
  • an implicit indication may be based on the location and/or resources used for transmission; an explicit indication may be based on one or more parameters, and/or one or more indices, and/or one or more bit pattern.
  • the data block represents the above-mentioned network coding block
  • the sub-block represents the above-mentioned network coding packet (that is, the network coding packet carried in the network coding block).
  • a transmission block may include one or more sub-blocks
  • a data block may include one or more sub-blocks.
  • "a sub-block carried in a transport block" and "data of a transport block” are sometimes used interchangeably to represent the same meaning.
  • the lower layer reports the data of the transport block to the upper layer, or alternatively, the lower layer reports the sub-block carried in the transport block to the upper layer.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a data transmission method 1200 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Method 1200 may include the following steps.
  • the first communication device receives M TBs from the second communication device, and the M TBs are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block after network encoding.
  • M is a positive integer.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device sends K sub-blocks to the upper layer of the first communication device, where the K sub-blocks are sub-blocks transmitted by TBs with correct channel decoding among the M TBs.
  • K is a positive integer.
  • the high layer of the first communication device may represent a protocol layer capable of implementing a network coding function.
  • the high layer of the first communication device may be any of the following: RLC layer, PDCP layer, MAC layer or NC layer.
  • the high layer of the first communication device may be an RLC layer; or, taking the structure shown in (b) or (c) in Figure 10 as an example, the first communication device The upper layer of the device may be the NC layer.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device may represent a protocol layer for receiving TB, or may represent a protocol layer for reporting TB data to a higher layer.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device is a PHY layer.
  • the upper layer of the first communication device sends notification information to the lower layer of the first communication device, where the notification information is used to notify whether the first data block is successfully decoded after the K sub-blocks undergo NC decoding.
  • the high layer of the first communication device sends notification information to the low layer of the first communication device, and the notification information uses to notify that the first data block is successfully decoded.
  • the lower layer (such as the physical layer) of the first communication device receives M TBs from the second communication device, and the M TBs transmit the same data block (for example, the first data block) after network coding One or more sub-blocks; if the lower layer of the first communication device correctly decodes M1 TB channels in the M TBs, then the lower layer of the first communication device sends all (K) sub-blocks transmitted by the M1 TBs to the upper layer ; If the upper layer of the first communication device can successfully decode the first data block through K sub-blocks, then the upper layer of the first communication device can send notification information to the lower layer, and the lower layer can know that it is not necessary to execute the first data block again according to the notification information.
  • Block-related operations such as no need to request retransmission of TBs other than M1 TBs among the M TBs, no need to receive and/or decode the TB used to transmit the first data block, etc. .
  • the upper layer of the first communication device may send notification information to the lower layer, and the lower layer may know that the first data block is still available according to the notification information. Decoding was unsuccessful. In this way, the waste of air interface resources can be reduced, and the power consumption overhead can be reduced.
  • the upper layer of the first communication device may not notify the lower layer, and the lower layer may perform normal operations such as retransmission.
  • a scheme for the upper layer to notify the lower layer when the first data block can be decoded based on the sub-block reported by the lower layer is introduced.
  • the following describes a specific solution from the perspective of TB in combination with method 1300. It can be understood that the solution in method 1300 below can be used in combination with the solution in method 1200 .
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a data transmission method 1300 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Method 1300 may include the following steps.
  • the first communication device receives N pieces of first control information, where the N pieces of first control information are used to indicate M TBs, and the N pieces of first control information are also used to indicate that M TBs are used to transmit the first data block through network coding One or more sub-blocks following. That is, the N pieces of first control information are also used to indicate that one or more network-coded sub-blocks transmitted by the M TBs belong to the same data block.
  • N and M are positive integers, and M is greater than or equal to N.
  • N is an integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • the first control information may be, for example, DCI, or may also be sidelink control information (sidelink control information, SCI), or may also be other control information, which is not limited.
  • the first data block is used to represent the same data block, and its naming does not limit the protection scope of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first data block can also be replaced with the target data block, or replaced with the same data block.
  • the first communications device receives M TBs based on the N pieces of first control information.
  • the first communication device learns from the N pieces of first control information that the M TBs indicated by the N pieces of first control information are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block after network coding.
  • the time delay requirement of the service can be satisfied as much as possible.
  • the connection between the TB and the first data block it is possible to know which TBs the first data block corresponds to, and then it is possible to determine the number of TBs corresponding to the first data block based on the NC decoding of the first data block.
  • TB feedback information is possible to be used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block after network coding.
  • the first communication device may no longer need to re-receive the un-channel-decoded data block through retransmission. Therefore, after the first data block is successfully decoded, the first communication device can set all HARQ process numbers of the M TBs as ACK, so that retransmission is unnecessary. Therefore, unnecessary retransmission is reduced, data transmission delay is reduced, and user experience is improved.
  • an association relationship may be used to represent (or represent) one or more network-coded sub-blocks of M TBs used to transmit the same data block (for example, denoted as the first data block). For example, if multiple TBs are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the same data block after network coding, it can be considered that the multiple TBs have an associated relationship; if multiple TBs are used to transmit different data blocks after network coding If there are one or more sub-blocks, it can be considered that the multiple TBs do not have an association relationship.
  • the multiple TBs have an association relationship, it can be considered that all the network-coded sub-blocks transmitted by the multiple TBs belong to the same data block; All sub-blocks after network coding do not belong to the same data block (may include some sub-blocks belonging to the same data block), or it can be considered that the multiple TBs are used to transmit different logical channels and/or radio data bearers corresponding to high-level data.
  • the TB has an association relationship mentioned below may be replaced with "the TB is used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the same data block after network encoding". That is, in the specific implementation process, there may be no concept of association relationship.
  • the association relationship is implemented through one or more bits in the first control information.
  • the first communication device can judge whether the received TB has an association relationship through the first control information, that is, the first communication device can judge whether the received TB is used to transmit the same data block through network coding through the first control information One or more sub-blocks following.
  • the first control information includes first information, where the first information is one or more bits, and the first information is used to indicate whether the TB has an association relationship.
  • the first information for example, may also be referred to as associated information.
  • each of the N pieces of first control information includes first information, and the N pieces of first information included in the N pieces of first control information are used to indicate that the M TBs are used for
  • the N pieces of first information may satisfy a preset condition, for example, the values of the N pieces of first information are the same.
  • the preset condition can be predefined by a standard, or can be configured by the network side. Wherein, if configured by the network side, the network side may send the configured preset condition to the terminal device.
  • each first control information includes the first information, and if the values of the first information in different first control information are the same, it is considered that the multiple TBs indicated by the different first control information have an association relationship; If the values of the first information in the different first control information are different, it is considered that the multiple TBs indicated by the different first control information do not have an association relationship.
  • the two DCIs are respectively recorded as DCI0 and DCI1, wherein the TB indicated by DCI0 is TB0, and the TB indicated by DCI1 is TB1.
  • the first information is a 2-bit field in the DCI, and the value range of this field is: 00, 01, 10, 11. If the values of the first information in DCI0 and DCI1 are the same, such as "01" (or other values), it can be considered that TB0 and TB1 have an associated relationship; if the values of the first information in DCI0 and DCI1 are different, If the first information of DCI0 is "00" and the first information of DCI1 is "10", it can be considered that TB0 and TB1 have no association relationship.
  • the first information is a 1-bit field in the DCI, and the value range of this field is: 0,1. If the values of the first information in DCI0 and DCI1 are the same, such as "1", it can be considered that TB0 and TB1 have an associated relationship; if the values of the first information in DCI0 and DCI1 are different, for example, the first information of DCI0 is "0", and the first information of DCI1 is "1", then it can be considered that TB0 and TB1 have no association relationship.
  • each of the one or more pieces of first control information in the N pieces of first control information includes first information, and the one or more pieces of first control information included in the one or more pieces of first control information include When the information satisfies the preset condition, it is used to indicate that the M TBs are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block after network coding.
  • the first control information among the N pieces of first control information includes the first information
  • the last control information among the N pieces of first control information includes the first information, when the first control information included in the first control information
  • the first communication device may determine that the M TBs have an association relationship.
  • the four DCIs are respectively recorded as DCI0, DCI1, DCI2, and DCI3, where the TB indicated by DCI0 is TB0, the TB indicated by DCI1 is TB1, the TB indicated by DCI2 is TB2, and the TB indicated by DCI3 is TB3.
  • both DCI0 and DCI3 include the first information
  • the first information included in DCI0 and DCI3 satisfies certain preset conditions
  • the first information is a 1-bit field in DCI, and the value range of this field is: 0, 1. If the first information values in DCI0 and DCI3 are both "1", it can be considered as DCI0-DCI3
  • the TBs indicated by the DCI among them have an association relationship, that is, TB0-TB3 have an association relationship.
  • each of the N pieces of first control information includes first information, and when the value of the N pieces of first information included in the N pieces of first control information satisfies a preset condition, the first The communication device determines that the M TBs have an association relationship.
  • the preset condition may indicate that the values of the N pieces of first information satisfy a certain rule, or may also indicate that the values of the N pieces of first information belong to values in a preset range.
  • the first control information is DCI
  • the two DCIs are respectively recorded as DCI0 and DCI1, wherein the TB indicated by DCI0 is TB0, and the TB indicated by DCI1 is TB1.
  • the first information is a 2-bit field in the DCI, and the value range of this field is: 00, 01, 10, 11. If the value of the first information in DCI0 and DCI1 belongs to the value of 01 and 10 (for example, the value of the first information in DCI0 is "01", and the value of the first information in DCI1 is "10"), then It can be considered that TB0 and TB1 have an associated relationship; if the values of the first information in DCI0 and DCI1 do not both belong to the values in 01 and 10 (for example, the value of the first information in DCI0 is "00", the first information in DCI1 The value of the information is "11”; or, the value of the first information in DCI0 is "01", and the value of the first information in DCI1 is "11”; or, the value of the first information in DCI0 is is "01", the value of the first information in DCI1 is "00", etc.), it can be considered that TB0 and TB1 have no association relationship.
  • N 1
  • the one piece of first control information includes first information
  • M TBs are used to transmit one or multiple subblocks.
  • one piece of first control information includes first information
  • the first control information may be used to indicate multiple TBs
  • the first information is used to indicate whether the multiple TBs have an association relationship.
  • the first information is 1 bit, if the value of the first information is "1", it is considered that the multiple TBs indicated by the first control information have an associated relationship; if the value of the first information is " 0", it is considered that the multiple TBs indicated by the first control information do not have an association relationship.
  • M TBs are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block after network coding.
  • one piece of first control information may be used to indicate multiple TBs, and whether the first control information includes the first information may be used to indicate whether the multiple TBs have an association relationship. For example, if the first control information includes the first information, it is considered that the multiple TBs indicated by the first control information have an association relationship; if the first control information does not include the first information, it is considered that the first control information The indicated multiple TBs do not have an association relationship.
  • first control information when one piece of first control information is used to indicate multiple TBs, it may be defaulted that the multiple TBs are used to transmit one or more network-coded sub-blocks of the first data block, that is, the M TBs have an association relationship.
  • the method 1300 further includes: the lower layer of the first communication device sends K sub-blocks to the upper layer of the first communication device, where the K sub-blocks are sub-blocks transmitted by TBs with correct channel decoding among the M TBs.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device After the first communication device receives M TBs based on the N pieces of first control information in step 1310, the lower layer of the first communication device performs channel decoding on the M TBs; if M1 of the M TBs of the first communication device If the TB channel decoding is correct, then the lower layer of the first communication device reports to the upper layer all (K) sub-blocks transmitted by the M1 TBs (or in other words: the lower layer of the first communication device reports to the upper layer all the sub-blocks carried in the M1 TBs to the upper layer of K sub-blocks).
  • M1 may be smaller than M, or M1 may also be equal to M. For example, if the CRC check corresponding to the TB passes, it can be considered that the channel decoding of the TB is correct.
  • the upper layer of the first communication device may perform NC decoding on the K sub-blocks, and send the second information to the lower layer of the first communication device based on the NC decoding result.
  • the upper layer of the first communication device sends second information to the lower layer of the first communication device, where the second information is used to indicate whether the first data block is successfully decoded after the K sub-blocks undergo NC decoding.
  • the second information may be a signaling generated and sent by a high layer of the first communication device.
  • the second information is the same as the notification information in step 1230, and is used to indicate whether the first data block is successfully decoded after the K sub-blocks are NC-decoded.
  • the following mainly takes the second information as an example for illustration, and the second information hereinafter can be replaced with the notification information in step 130 .
  • the upper layer of the first communication device sends the second information to the lower layer of the first communication device, The second information is used to indicate successful decoding of the first data block.
  • the upper layer of the first communication device sends second information to the lower layer of the first communication device, and the second information is used to indicate The first block of data was not successfully decoded.
  • the first data block when K is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, the first data block can be successfully decoded after K sub-blocks are NC-decoded.
  • the preset threshold can be predefined by a standard, or can be configured by the network side. Wherein, if configured by the network side, the network side may send the configured preset threshold to the terminal device.
  • the second information includes information #A and/or an identifier of at least one TB among the M1 TBs.
  • the second information includes information #A, and the information #A is used to indicate whether the first data block is successfully decoded.
  • the first communication device learns whether the first data block is decoded successfully.
  • the information #A is 1 bit, and the value range of the information #A is: 0,1. If the value of information #A is "1", it can be considered that the second information is used to indicate that the first data block is successfully decoded; if the value of information #A is "0", it can be considered that the second information is used to indicate that the first data block has not been decoded. Successfully decoded first data block.
  • the second information includes an identifier of at least one TB among the M1 TBs
  • the first communication device learns that the first data block has been successfully decoded according to the identifier of at least one TB among the M1 TBs.
  • the identifier of at least one TB among the M1 TBs can be used to indicate that the first data block is successfully decoded, that is, if the second information includes the identifier of at least one TB among the M1 TBs, the first communication device can determine Successfully decoded first data block.
  • the first communications device determines the identifiers of the M TBs according to the identifier of at least one TB in the M1 TBs. Determining the identities of the M TBs will be described in detail later.
  • the second information includes information #A and an identifier of at least one TB among the M1 TBs.
  • information #A is used to indicate successful decoding of the first data block.
  • the first communications device determines the identifiers of the M TBs according to the identifier of at least one TB in the M1 TBs. Determining the identities of the M TBs will be described in detail later.
  • the identifier of the TB is used to identify the TB.
  • the identifier of the TB may be the HARQ process number of the TB or the index (index) of the TB.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device sends third information to the upper layer of the first communication device, where the third information is used to indicate at least one of the M1 TBs The HARQ process ID of a TB.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device can report the HARQ process number to the upper layer of the first communication device, and then the higher layer can learn the HARQ process number for transmitting the first data block.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device sends K sub-blocks to the upper layer of the first communication device, at the same time, the lower layer of the first communication device sends at least one of the M1 TBs transmitting the K sub-blocks to the upper layer of the first communication device The HARQ process number of the TB.
  • the upper layer of the first communication device may select the first data block to which the K sub-blocks belong and the HARQ process number build connection. If the first data block is decodable, the upper layer of the first communication device sends the second information to the lower layer of the first communication device, and carries the received HARQ process number.
  • the third information as an example to indicate the HARQ process numbers of M1 TBs, two examples are introduced below.
  • Example 1 after M1 TBs are successfully decoded by the lower layer, the lower layer reports the sub-blocks transmitted by the M1 TBs and the HARQ process numbers of the M1 TBs to the upper layer.
  • the first communication device when the first communication device receives M TBs, it will perform channel decoding (such as low density parity check code (LDPC)) on the M TBs, and pass the CRC check result It is judged whether the channel decoding of the M TBs is successful. Assuming that M1 TBs in the M TBs are successfully decoded on the physical layer channel, the physical layer of the first communication device reports the data of the M1 TBs (for example, K sub-blocks) and the HARQ process numbers of the M1 TBs to the top.
  • channel decoding such as low density parity check code (LDPC)
  • LDPC low density parity check code
  • the M1 TBs are demultiplexed at the MAC layer, that is, the MAC layer transfers the data in the M1 TBs and the HARQ process numbers of the M1 TBs to the corresponding logical channel and Data radio bearer (data radio bearer, DRB), and then reported to the upper layer.
  • the MAC layer transfers the data in the M1 TBs and the HARQ process numbers of the M1 TBs to the corresponding logical channel and Data radio bearer (data radio bearer, DRB), and then reported to the upper layer.
  • DRB Data radio bearer
  • Example 2 After M1 TBs are successfully decoded at the lower layer, if the logical channel or DRB corresponding to the data of the M1 TBs adopts network coding, the lower layer reports the data of the M1 TBs and the HARQ process of the M1 TBs to the upper layer Number.
  • Example 2 if the TB is used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block after network coding, the MAC layer reports the data in the TB and the HARQ process number corresponding to the TB to the On the logical channel; if the TB is not used to transmit one or more sub-blocks after the network coding of the first data block, the MAC layer demultiplexes the data in the TB to the corresponding logical channel, and does not need to send the corresponding The HARQ process ID. As an example, if the logical channel or DRB corresponding to the data in the TB adopts network coding, it is considered that the TB is used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block after network coding.
  • the first communication device when it receives M TBs, it will perform channel decoding on the M TBs, and judge whether the channel decoding of the M TBs is successful according to the CRC check result. Assume that M1 TBs among the M TBs are successfully decoded at the physical layer, and the data in the M1 TBs belong to the data of the first data block (or the M1 TBs are used to transmit the first data block after network encoding) sub-blocks), the physical layer of the first communication device reports the data of the M1 TBs (for example, K sub-blocks) and the HARQ process numbers of the M1 TBs to the upper layer.
  • M1 TBs among the M TBs are successfully decoded at the physical layer, and the data in the M1 TBs belong to the data of the first data block (or the M1 TBs are used to transmit the first data block after network encoding) sub-blocks)
  • the physical layer of the first communication device reports the data of the M1
  • the CRC check of M1 TBs passes, when M1 TBs will be demultiplexed at the MAC layer, it can be judged whether the data of M1 TBs belongs to the data of the first data block; if the data of M1 TBs belongs to the first block
  • the data of the data block indicates that the logical channel or DRB corresponding to the data of the M1 TBs adopts network coding, and the data of the M1 TBs and the HARQ process numbers corresponding to the M1 TBs can be reported to the upper layer together.
  • the above describes the relevant solutions for the identification of M1 TBs. It can be understood that the above is an example of reporting the HARQ process numbers of the M1 TBs from the lower layer of the first communication device to the upper layer of the first communication device. Embodiments are not limited thereto. In this embodiment of the present application, the lower layer of the first communication device may report the HARQ process number of at least one TB in the M1 TBs to the upper layer of the first communication device.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device reports the HARQ process number of one of the M1 TBs to the upper layer of the first communication device; for another example, the lower layer of the first communication device reports the M1 TBs to the upper layer of the first communication device HARQ process numbers of some TBs; for another example, the lower layer of the first communication device reports the HARQ process numbers of each TB in the M1 TBs to the upper layer of the first communication device.
  • the following describes a solution for the first communication device to determine the identities of the M TBs.
  • the determining, by the first communication device, the identity of the M TBs according to the identity of at least one TB in the M1 TBs may include determining, by the first communication device, the identity of each of the M TBs according to the identity of at least one TB in the M1 TBs. Two possible situations are combined for description below.
  • the first communication device receives the identifier of each TB in the M TBs from the second communication device, as in step 1310, the N pieces of first control information include the identifier of each TB in the M TBs .
  • the lower layer of the first communication device after the lower layer of the first communication device receives the identifier of at least one TB in the M1 TBs (in order to distinguish the identifier of the target TB) from the upper layer of the first communication device, it may, according to the target
  • the TB identifier determines the target TB, and then determines the identifier of each TB in the M TBs that have an association relationship with the target TB.
  • the four DCIs respectively include the HARQ process number of each TB, that is, DCI0 includes the HARQ process number of TB0
  • DCI1 includes the HARQ process number of TB1
  • DCI2 Including the HARQ process number of TB2
  • DCI3 includes the HARQ process number of TB3.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device receives the HARQ process number identified as TB0 of at least one TB in the M1 TBs from the upper layer of the first communication device.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device After the lower layer of the first communication device receives the HARQ process number of TB0 from the upper layer of the first communication device, it can determine the HARQ process number of TB0, and determine the HARQ process number of TB1 according to the relationship between TB0 and TB1, TB2, and TB3 , the HARQ process number of TB2, and the HARQ process number of TB3.
  • the first communication device receives an identifier of at least one TB in the M TBs from the second communication device.
  • the identifiers of the M TBs may have a certain relationship
  • the first communication device may, according to the identifier of a certain TB in the M TBs and the relationship between the identifiers of the M TBs, Determine the identity of the remaining TBs.
  • the first communication device receives the identifier of the smallest TB among the M TBs (such as the identifier of the first TB) from the second communications device, and the identifiers of TBs other than the first TB among the M TBs can be Gradually add 1 to the first TB mark.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device receives the identifier of at least one TB (in this case, the identifier of the first TB) among the M1 TBs from the upper layer of the first communication device, it may The identifier of the first TB determines the first TB, and further determines the identifiers of the M TBs associated with the first TB.
  • first control information for example, DCI0
  • 4 TBs have an association relationship, that is, TB0, TB1, TB2, and TB3 are used to transmit the first data block through One or more sub-blocks after network encoding.
  • the HARQ process numbers of adjacent TBs differ by x (x is, for example, 1, or an integer greater than 1)
  • DCI0 includes the HARQ process number of the first TB (such as TB0).
  • the lower layer of the first communication device receives the HARQ process number identified as TB0 of at least one TB in the M1 TBs from the upper layer.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device receives the HARQ process number of TB0 from the upper layer of the first communication device, it can determine the HARQ process number of TB0, and according to the relationship between TB0 and TB1, TB2, and TB3 The association relationship, and according to the difference x between the HARQ process numbers of adjacent TBs in the four TBs, determine the HARQ process number of TB1, the HARQ process number of TB2, and the HARQ process number of TB3.
  • the HARQ process number of TB0 is HARQ process number 3
  • the HARQ process number of TB1 is HARQ process number 4
  • the HARQ process number of TB2 is HARQ process number 5
  • the HARQ process number of TB3 is HARQ process number 6.
  • the M TBs have an association relationship, as long as the identification of the other TBs in the M TBs can be determined according to one TB in the M TBs, it is applicable to this embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit whether the identifiers of the TBs in the M TBs are the same.
  • the TB identifier sent by the lower layer of the first communication device to the upper layer of the first communication device may be the same as or different from the TB identifier sent by the upper layer of the first communication device to the lower layer of the first communication device. , which is not restricted. A few examples are listed below.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device sends the identifier of one of the M1 TBs (referred to as the identifier of TB#1 for ease of description) to the upper layer of the first communication device.
  • the TB identifier sent by the upper layer of the first communication device to the lower layer of the first communication device may be the identifier of TB#1.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device sends identifiers of multiple TBs among the M1 TBs (for ease of description, denoted as the identifier of TB#1 and the identifier of TB#2) to the upper layer of the first communication device.
  • the TB identifier sent by the upper layer of the first communication device to the lower layer of the first communication device may be the identifier of TB#1, or the TB identifier sent by the upper layer of the first communication device to the lower layer of the first communication device It may be the identifier of TB#2, or the identifier of the TB sent by the upper layer of the first communication device to the lower layer of the first communication device may be the identifier of TB#1 and the identifier of TB#2.
  • the first communication device determines that the feedback result of the HARQ process of the M TBs is ACK according to the second information.
  • the first communication device when the lower layer of the first communication device receives the second information, and the second information is used to indicate that the first data block is successfully decoded, if at least one TB among the M TBs is not channel-decoded correctly (That is, when M1 is less than M), the first communication device determines the identities of the M TBs (such as HARQ process numbers) according to the second information, and then determines that the feedback results of the HARQ processes of the M TBs are all ACK. Two implementation methods are described below.
  • the second information includes an identifier of at least one TB in the M1 TBs
  • the first communication device determines that the feedback results of the HARQ processes of the M TBs are all ACKs according to the identifier of at least one TB in the M1 TBs.
  • the first communication device determines the identifiers of the M TBs according to the identifiers of at least one of the M1 TBs included in the second information, and then can determine the HARQ processes of the M TBs (that is, the HARQ process corresponding to the M TBs).
  • the feedback results of the M HARQ processes) are all ACK.
  • the lower layer determines that the feedback result of the at least one HARQ process is ACK according to the definition (for example, the protocol definition). After receiving the second information, the lower layer of the first communication device determines that the feedback result of the HARQ process of the at least one HARQ process is ACK, and the M TBs have an association relationship, so it is determined that the feedback result of the HARQ process of the M TBs is ACK.
  • first control information such as DCI0, DCI1, DCI2, and DCI3 respectively
  • the lower layer of the first communication device correctly decodes TB0, TB2 and TB3 indicated by DCI0, DCI2 and DCI3, and TB1 indicated by DCI1 fails to decode at the lower layer; the lower layer of the first communication device reports the data of TB0, TB2 and TB3 to The upper layer of the first communication device sends the second information to the lower layer of the first communication device when the upper layer of the first communication device can successfully decode the first data block based on the data of TB0, TB2, and TB3.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device reports the data of TB0, TB2, and TB3 to the upper layer of the first communication device, it also reports the HARQ process numbers of TB0, TB2, and TB3 at the same time, and the upper layer of the first communication device reports to the upper layer of the first communication device
  • the second information includes the HARQ process number of TBO.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device learns that TB0 has an association relationship with TB1, TB2, and TB3 according to the association relationship, so it can be determined that the feedback results of the HARQ processes of TB0, TB1, TB2, and TB3 are all ACK.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device when the lower layer of the first communication device reports the data of TB0, TB2, and TB3 to the upper layer of the first communication device, it also reports the HARQ process numbers of TB0, TB2, and TB3 at the same time, and the upper layer of the first communication device reports to the first communication device
  • the second information includes the HARQ process numbers of TB0, TB2, and TB3.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device learns that TB0, TB2, and TB3 are associated with TB1 according to the association relationship. Therefore, it can be determined that the feedback results of the HARQ processes of TB0, TB1, TB2, and TB3 are all ACK.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device when the lower layer of the first communication device reports the data of TB0, TB2, and TB3 to the upper layer of the first communication device, it reports the HARQ process number of TB0 at the same time, and the upper layer of the first communication device sends the first
  • the second information includes the HARQ process number of TB0.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device learns that TB0 has an association relationship with TB2, TB3, and TB1 according to the association relationship, so it can determine TB0, TB1 , the feedback results of the HARQ processes of TB2 and TB3 are all ACK.
  • the first communication device determines that the feedback results of the HARQ processes of the M TBs are ACKs according to the preset identifier and the logical channel and/or DRB corresponding to the first data block.
  • the first communication device determines the identifiers of the M TBs according to the preset identifier and the logical channel and/or DRB corresponding to the first data block, and then can determine that the feedback result of the HARQ process of the M TBs is ACK .
  • the preset identifier includes identifiers of M TBs.
  • the identities of the M TBs are selected from preset identities.
  • the N pieces of first control information are also used to indicate identifiers of M TBs, and the identifiers of the M TBs belong to the preset identifier.
  • the preset identifier is used to indicate the logical channel corresponding to the first data block and/or the DRB-bound (or available) TB identifier.
  • the preset identifier indicates the TB identifier of the logical channel binding corresponding to the first data block
  • the TB identifier is the HARQ process number of the TB as an example for illustration.
  • the HARQ process number bound to the logical channel indicates the available HARQ process number of the logical channel, that is, the data of the logical channel is transmitted on the HARQ process bound to the logical channel.
  • the relationship between the HARQ process number and the first data block can be established by binding the HARQ process number to the logical channel, so that the data of the logical channel where the first data block is located is bound to the logical channel. Transmission is performed on a specified HARQ process.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device correctly decodes TB0, TB2, and TB3 indicated by DCI0, DCI2, and DCI3, and the decoding of TB1 indicated by DCI1 fails at the lower layer, the lower layer reports the data of TB0, TB2, and TB3 to the upper layer.
  • the data of TB0, TB2, and TB3 can successfully decode the first data block, and send the second information to the lower layer.
  • the upper layer of the first communication device sends the second information to the lower layer of the first communication device, and the second information includes information #A.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device learns from the information #A that the first data block is successfully decoded after K sub-blocks are decoded by NC; the first communication device decodes the first data block according to the logical channel corresponding to the first data block and
  • the HARQ process number is preset, and all the HARQ feedbacks of the preset HARQ process number are set as ACK.
  • the preset HARQ process number includes the HARQ process numbers of TB0, TB1, TB2, and TB3.
  • the first communication device acquires information of a preset identifier, where the information of the preset identifier includes: a start identifier, an end identifier, and a number of identifiers.
  • the first communication device receives the configuration information of the logical channel corresponding to the first data block, and the configuration information may include one or more of the following information of a preset HARQ process number: Process number, end HARQ process number, number of HARQ processes.
  • the allowedSPS-List parameter is added to the configuration information of the LogicalChannelConfig information element in the radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC), which may specifically be:
  • nrofHARQ-Processes is used to indicate the number of HARQ processes available to the logical channel
  • harq-ProcID-harq-ProcID-Offset-r19 is used to indicate the initial HARQ process number available to the logical channel.
  • HARQ process available for the logical channel is: 4 consecutive HARQ processes starting with HARQ process number 5, that is, HARQ The process number is 5, the HARQ process number is 6, the HARQ process number is 7, and the HARQ process number is 8.
  • the method 1300 further includes: the first communication device stops receiving and/or stops decoding the TB used to transmit the first data block, and the first communication device stops receiving or stops monitoring the first data block. 2. control information.
  • the response information of all HARQ processes corresponding to M TBs can be replaced with ACK, or it can be replaced with the second information to indicate successful decoding after K sub-blocks are decoded by NC
  • the first data block or alternatively, the second information is used to indicate that the first data block can be successfully decoded.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device after the lower layer of the first communication device receives the second information, since the first data block can be successfully decoded, it can stop the operation related to the transmission of the first data block, and can also stop the operation related to the retransmission Operations related to the M TBs.
  • the first data block since the first data block can be successfully decoded, it can stop the operation related to the transmission of the first data block, and can also stop the operation related to the retransmission Operations related to the M TBs.
  • the first communication device stops receiving and/or stops decoding the TB used to transmit the first data block.
  • the first communication device receives X pieces of third control information from the second communication device, where the X pieces of third control information are used to indicate L TBs, where L is a positive integer, and the L TBs and the M TBs have connection relation.
  • the first communication device stops receiving the L TBs; if the first communication device has received the L TBs, then the first communication The device stops decoding data in the L TBs.
  • the first communications device stops (stops) timers corresponding to the HARQ processes of the L TBs.
  • stop may also be replaced by close (close), or may also be replaced by cut off (switch off), or not open.
  • the first communication device receives first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure timers corresponding to HARQ processes of L TBs.
  • the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of the L TBs can be used to indicate one or more of the following: the physical control channel indicates a duration after a new transmission for the MAC entity, and the duration at the start of DRX (the duration at the beginning of a DRX cycle).
  • the first communication device monitors the control information within the above duration (for example, the first communication device monitors the third control information within the above duration), if the first communication device monitors the control information within the duration, then the second A communication device starts timers corresponding to the HARQ processes of the L TBs.
  • the first notification device considering that the first data block can be successfully decoded, even if the first notification device detects the control information, it may not start the timers corresponding to the HARQ processes of the L TBs, or in the L When the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of TB is already in the enabled state, the timer can be disabled.
  • the timers corresponding to the HARQ processes of L TBs include one or more of the following timers: drx-InacvitityTimer, drx-onDurationTimer.
  • the drx-InacvitityTimer is used to indicate (or be used for implementation, or be used for control) the duration after the physical control channel indicates a new transmission for the MAC entity.
  • the drx-onDurationTimer is used to indicate (or to implement, or to control) the duration of DRX start.
  • the first communication device stops receiving or stops monitoring the second control information.
  • the second control information is used to instruct retransmission of at least one TB in the M TBs.
  • M1 is less than M.
  • the first communication device decodes the (M-M1) TB channels incorrectly, the prior art The first communication device will receive or monitor (or monitor) the retransmission control information (that is, the second control information) of the (M-M1) TBs.
  • the first communication device may stop receiving or monitoring the second control information; in other words, since the first data block can is successfully decoded, so the first communication device can determine that the response information of all HARQ processes corresponding to M TBs is ACK, so the first communication device can stop receiving or stop monitoring the second control information, and the (M-M1 ) TB for retransmission.
  • the TB indicated by the second control information is the TB indicated by the first control information retransmission of , wherein the second control information is later than the first control information.
  • the first communications device stops the timers corresponding to the HARQ processes of the M TBs.
  • the first communication device receives second configuration information, where the second configuration information is used to configure timers corresponding to HARQ processes of M TBs.
  • the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of the M TBs can be used to indicate one or more of the following: the maximum duration until a DL retransmission is received, the MAC entity expects to receive the HARQ retransmission The minimum duration of the allocation.
  • the first communication device monitors the control information indicating the retransmission corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks within the above-mentioned maximum duration (for example, the first communication device monitors the second control information within the above-mentioned duration).
  • the first notification device considering that the first data block can be successfully decoded, even if the first notification device detects the control information, it may not start the timers corresponding to the HARQ processes of the M TBs, or the M When the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of TB is already in the enabled state, the timer can be disabled.
  • the timers corresponding to the HARQ processes of M TBs include one or more of the following timers: drx-RetransmissionTimer, drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer.
  • drx-RetransmissionTimer For example, if the lower layer of the first communication device receives the second information from the upper layer, the first communication device closes or stops or does not start drx-RetransmissionTimer.
  • the drx-RetransmissionTimer is used to indicate (or be used for realization, or be called for control) the maximum duration of waiting for retransmission.
  • the drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer is used to indicate (or be used for implementation, or be used for control) the minimum duration that the MAC entity expects to receive the HARQ retransmission allocation.
  • timers reference may be made to the previous descriptions in FIG. 5 to FIG. 8 , which will not be repeated here.
  • the first communication The device can start a timer, such as a PDSCHskipping timer.
  • PDSCHskipping is only a possible naming, and the naming does not limit the protection scope of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the second information may also be used to indicate that the information of the TB indicated by the third control information does not need to be received and/or decoded after receiving the second information.
  • the second information includes a PDSCHskipping field, and the PDSCHskipping field is used to indicate that the information of the TB indicated by the third control information does not need to be received and/or decoded after receiving the second information.
  • a PDSCHskipping field can be added to the second information, and the PDSCHskipping field can be represented by the third
  • the number of control information is a unit (for example, 0, 1, 2).
  • a PDSCHskipping field may be added to the second information, and the PDSCHskipping field may be in the form of time
  • the unit for example, 10ms, 20ms
  • the time slot may also be used as the unit.
  • the PDSCHskipping parameter is added to the DRX-config in the RRC, as shown below.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device correctly decodes TB0, TB2, TB3 indicated by DCI0, DCI2, DCI3, the lower layer of the first communication device Report the sub-blocks carried in TB0, TB2, and TB3 to the high layer, and the high layer can successfully decode the first data block based on the sub-blocks carried in TB0, TB2, and TB3, that is, the second information is used to indicate that the data block carried in TB0, TB2, The sub-block in TB3 successfully decodes the first data block after NC decoding.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device receives the second information from the upper layer before or during the blind detection of DCI4.
  • DCI4 that is, the aforementioned third control information
  • the L TBs are associated with M TBs.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device after confirming that the L TBs indicated by DCI4 are associated with the TBs indicated by DCI0-3, the lower layer of the first communication device no longer receives and/or decodes the L TBs indicated by DCI4,
  • the HARQ process feedback of the TB indicated by the DCI4 is set as ACK, and the drx-InactivityTimer is not triggered for the DCI4 (or the HARQ process of the TB indicated by the DCI4).
  • the lower layer of the first communication device receives the second information from the upper layer during the process of decoding the TB indicated by DCI4.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device may perform one or more of the following operations: interrupt the translation of the TB indicated by DCI4 Code process, clear the HARQ buffer related to the TB indicated by the DCI4, set the HARQ process feedback of the TB indicated by the DCI4 to ACK, and not trigger drx- InactivityTimer.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device receives the second information from the upper layer after decoding the TB indicated by DCI4.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device does not trigger drx for the DCI4 (or the HARQ process of the TB indicated by the DCI4) -InactivityTimer.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device receives the second information from the upper layer during the running of the drx-InactivityTimer corresponding to the DCI4.
  • DCI4 has triggered drx-InactivityTimer.
  • the first communication device stops drx-InacvitityTimer, and the TB indicated by DCI4
  • the HARQ process feedback is set to ACK.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device receives the second information from the upper layer during the running of the drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer.
  • DCI1 has triggered drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer.
  • the first communication device may perform one or more of the following: (1) set TB1 The HARQ process feedback is set to ACK, (2) stop drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer, (3) if the TB decoding indicated by DCI1 fails, do not trigger drx-RetransmissionTimer for DCI1 (or the HARQ process of TB1).
  • the lower layer of the first communication device receives DCI4 during the running of the drx-PDSCHskipping timer.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device After receiving the second information, the lower layer of the first communication device starts the drx-PDSCHskipping timer, and receives DCI4 during the running of the drx-PDSCHskipping timer, and the lower layer of the first communication device confirms the TB indicated by DCI4 and the TB indicated by DCI0-3. After the indicated TB has an association relationship, one or more of the following can be performed: (1) set the HARQ process feedback of the TB indicated by DCI4 to ACK, (2) not decode the TB indicated by DCI4, (3) drx-InactivityTimer is not triggered for this DCI4.
  • the lower layer of the first communication device receives the second information from the upper layer during the running of drx-onDurationTimer and/or drx-InactivityTimer.
  • the first communication device receives DCI4, and the first communication device does not trigger drx-InacvitityTimer for the PDCCH corresponding to DCI4 after confirming that the TB indicated by DCI4 has an association relationship with the TB indicated by DCI0-3,
  • the HARQ process feedback of the TB indicated by the DCI4 is set as ACK.
  • the above description is combined with several scenarios as an example, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited to the foregoing several scenarios. It can be understood that, in any scenario, for the HARQ processes of TB0, TB1, TB2, and TB3, and the HARQ processes of TBs associated with TB0, TB1, TB2, and TB3, the feedback is ACK.
  • the second information is used to indicate that the sub-blocks carried in TB0, TB2, and TB3 have successfully decoded the first data block after NC decoding.
  • the TB indicated by the second information below refers to the TB related to the second information, or in other words, the TB used to transmit the first data block.
  • the second information is used to indicate that the sub-blocks carried in TB0, TB2, and TB3 have successfully decoded the first data block after NC decoding, and the TBs indicated by the second information include: TB0, TB1, TB2, and TB3.
  • the second information is used to indicate that the sub-blocks carried in TB0, TB2, and TB3 have successfully decoded the first data block after NC decoding, and the second information includes an identifier of at least one TB, and the second information indicates The TB includes a TB corresponding to the at least one TB identifier, and a TB associated with the TB corresponding to the at least one TB identifier.
  • the identifier of at least one TB may include one or more of the following: an identifier of TBO, an identifier of TB2, and an identifier of TB3.
  • the drx-PDSCHskipping timer (or start the drx-PDSCHskipping timer from the beginning of the next adjacent time slot). If the time when the lower layer of the first communication device receives the PDCCH is later than the arrival time of the second information but not later than the time corresponding to the timeout of the drx-PDSCHskipping timer, and the TB scheduled (or indicated) by the PDCCH is the same as the first If the TB indicated by the two information has an association relationship, the PDCCH will not trigger drx-InactivityTimer, or the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH will not be decoded, or the HARQ process feedback of the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH will be set as ACK.
  • the PDCCH will not trigger drx-InactivityTimer, and the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH will not be decoded, and the HARQ process feedback of the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH will be set as ACK .
  • All the HARQ process feedbacks of the TBs indicated by the second information are set as ACK.
  • the HARQ process feedback corresponding to the PDSCH is set as ACK.
  • the PDCCH will not trigger drx-InactivityTimer, or the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH will not be decoded, or the HARQ process feedback of the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH will be set for ACK.
  • the PDCCH will not trigger drx-InactivityTimer, and the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH will not be decoded, and the HARQ process feedback of the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH will be set for ACK.
  • the second information is used to indicate that the sub-blocks carried in TB0, TB2, and TB3 have successfully decoded the first data block after NC decoding, and the first communication device receives the second information from the second The communication device receives the HARQ process number of the TB indicated by the second information.
  • the TB indicated by the second information indicates the TB related to the second information, or indicates the TB used to transmit the first data block.
  • the second information is used to indicate that the sub-blocks carried in TB0, TB2, and TB3 have successfully decoded the first data block after NC decoding
  • the TBs indicated by the second information include: TB0, TB1, TB2, TB3, the second
  • the HARQ process number of the TB indicated by the information includes: the HARQ process number of TB0, the HARQ process number of TB1, the HARQ process number of TB2, and the HARQ process number of TB3.
  • the second information is used to indicate that the sub-blocks carried in TB0, TB2, and TB3 have successfully decoded the first data block after NC decoding
  • the second information includes an identifier of at least one TB
  • the second information indicates The TB includes the TB corresponding to the identifier of the at least one TB, and the TB associated with the TB corresponding to the identifier of the at least one TB
  • the HARQ process number of the TB indicated by the second information includes: the identifier of the at least one TB The HARQ process number of the corresponding TB, and the HARQ process number of the TB associated with the TB corresponding to the at least one TB identifier.
  • the identifier of at least one TB may include one or more of the following: an identifier of TBO, an identifier of TB2, and an identifier of TB3.
  • All the HARQ process feedbacks of the TBs indicated by the second information are set as ACK.
  • the PDSCH is being decoded, and the TB corresponding to the PDSCH has an association relationship with the TB indicated by the second information, perform one or more of 3a, 3b, and 3c.
  • the HARQ process feedback corresponding to the PDSCH is set as ACK.
  • the PDCCH will not trigger drx-InactivityTimer, or the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH will not be decoded, or the HARQ process feedback of the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH will be set for ACK.
  • the PDCCH will not trigger drx-InactivityTimer, and the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH will not be decoded, and the HARQ process feedback of the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH will be set for ACK.
  • the drx-PDSCHskipping timer (or start the drx-PDSCHskipping timer from the beginning of the next adjacent time slot). If the time when the lower layer of the first communication device receives the PDCCH is later than the arrival time of the second information but not later than the time corresponding to the timeout of the drx-PDSCHskipping timer, and the TB scheduled (or indicated) by the PDCCH is the same as the first If the TB indicated by the two information has an association relationship, the PDCCH will not trigger drx-InactivityTimer, or the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH will not be decoded, or the HARQ process feedback of the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH will be set as ACK.
  • the PDCCH will not trigger drx-InactivityTimer, and the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH will not be decoded, and the HARQ process feedback of the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH will be set as ACK .
  • All the HARQ process feedbacks of the TBs indicated by the second information are set as ACK.
  • the HARQ process feedback corresponding to the PDSCH is set as ACK.
  • the PDCCH will not trigger drx-InactivityTimer, or the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH will not be decoded, or the HARQ process feedback of the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH is all ACK .
  • the PDCCH will not trigger drx-InactivityTimer, and the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH will not be decoded, and the HARQ process feedback of the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH is all ACK .
  • the method 1300 further includes: the first communication device enables the HARQ of the retransmitted TB among the M TBs The timer corresponding to the process.
  • starting the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of the retransmitted TB in the M TBs includes: starting the retransmitted TB in the M TBs in the next adjacent time unit after the drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer expires The timer drx-RetransmissionTimer corresponding to the HARQ process.
  • the first communication device starts the timer drx-RetransmissionTimer corresponding to the HARQ process of the retransmitted transport block in the M transport blocks in the first time unit, wherein the first time unit is later than the second time unit, and The first time unit is adjacent to the second time unit, and the second time unit indicates a time unit at which the drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer times out.
  • a time unit also called a time domain unit
  • time unit sizes are only for the convenience of understanding the solutions of the present application, and do not limit the scope of protection of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the next adjacent time unit after drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer expires (such as the start time or end time of the next adjacent time unit, Or at any time in the middle) start the drx-RetransmissionTimer of the HARQ process of the retransmitted TB in the M TBs.
  • the unit starts the drx-RetransmissionTimer corresponding to the HARQ process.
  • the method 1300 further includes: the first communication device sending fourth information to the second communication device, where the fourth information is used to notify the second communication device whether to continue sending the data of the first data block.
  • the method 1300 further includes: the first communication device sends fourth information to the second communication device, and the fourth information is used to notify the second communication device to stop sending the first data block block of data.
  • the method 1300 further includes: the first communication device sends fourth information to the second communication device, and the fourth information is used to notify the second communication device to continue sending the first data block. A block of data.
  • the response information of all HARQ processes corresponding to M TBs can be replaced with ACK, or it can be replaced with the second information to indicate successful decoding after K sub-blocks are decoded by NC
  • the first data block or alternatively, the second information is used to indicate that the first data block can be successfully decoded.
  • the second communication device if the second communication device continues to send the data of the first data block when the first data block is successfully decoded, not only will it not help the decoding of the first communication device, but it will also occupy air interface resources, resulting in Waste of air interface resources. Therefore, in the case of successfully decoding the first data block (for example, the lower layer of the first communication device receives the second information, and the second information is used to indicate successful decoding of the first data block), the first communication device sends to the second communication device The fourth information is used to notify to stop sending the data of the first data block, so as to save air interface resources.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of network coding feedback based on an RLC layer provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the decoding situation of the first data block can be fed back based on the RLC acknowledged mode (acknowledged mode, AM), as shown in FIG. 14, which can be used for RLC and The RLC of the receiving end (such as the first communication device).
  • RLC acknowledged mode acknowledged mode, AM
  • high-level data (such as PDCP) can be cached after being encoded by the network on the left link, such as in the NC buffer, and sent according to MAC layer resources; when receiving data from the right link
  • the routing (routing) module can send the RLC status report to the RLC/NC control (control) module to indicate whether to continue sending the data of the first data block.
  • the TB is passed to the NC decoder side after being routed; the NC decoder can judge the first TB to which the current TB belongs based on the number of K and the network coding content indicated by each TB header.
  • the RLC/NC control The module can send an NC positive response to the sending end; if the first data block cannot be successfully decoded based on the K sub-blocks (such as K is less than a preset threshold), the sending end can store the received TB in the NC buffer.
  • NC packet counting NC packet counting
  • the fourth information includes an index of the first data block and/or indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the fourth information contains information of other first data blocks; or, the fourth information is used to indicate The number of transport blocks and/or sub-blocks required for the first data block.
  • the fourth information includes the index of the first data block, and the fourth information is used to notify the second communication device to stop sending the data of the first data block.
  • the second communication device learns to stop sending the data of the first data block according to the index of the first data block. In a possible situation, if the fourth information is used to indicate that the number of transport blocks and/or sub-blocks required for decoding the first data block is 0, the second communication device determines to stop sending the sub-blocks of the first data block. piece.
  • the fourth information includes information #B and the index of the first data block, and the information #B is used to notify whether to continue sending the data of the first data block.
  • the second communication device learns to stop sending the data of the first data block according to the index of the first data block and information #B.
  • the information #B is 1 bit, and the value range of the information #B is: 0,1. If the value of information #B is "1", it can be considered that the fourth information is used to notify the second communication device to stop sending the data of the first data block; if the value of information #B is "0", it can be considered The fourth information is used to notify the second communication device to continue sending the data of the first data block.
  • the fourth information includes indication information
  • the indication information is used to indicate whether the fourth information includes information of other first data blocks.
  • the second communication device learns whether the fourth information includes information of other first data blocks according to the indication information.
  • the indication information is 1 bit, and the value range of the indication information is: 0,1. If the value of the indication information is "1", it can be considered that the fourth information contains information of other first data blocks; if the value of the indication information is "0", it can be considered that the fourth information does not contain other first data blocks Information.
  • Fig. 15 is a schematic diagram of fourth information provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the fourth information may include the following fields: D/C, control PDU type (control PDU type, CPT), A/N, E, R. It can be understood that the number and names of the fields included in the fourth information are all illustrative descriptions and are not limited thereto.
  • D/C can be used to indicate whether the information is control information or data information.
  • the format shown in FIG. 15 is the format of the fourth information, so the D/C may be used to indicate that the fourth information is control information.
  • CPT can be used to indicate the type of control information. For example, if the value of CPT is "000”, it means that the control information is used for ARQ feedback in RLC-AM mode; if the value of CPT is "001", it means that the control information is used to indicate the transmission of network coding Condition.
  • the format shown in FIG. 15 is the format of the fourth information, so the value of the CPT is "001". It can be understood that the foregoing is an exemplary description, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the correspondence between the value of the CPT and the type of control information.
  • A/N may be used to indicate whether the data of the first data block needs to be sent continuously.
  • each A/N field occupies 1 bit, and each A/N has a corresponding first data block number (NC block number), and the A/N field and the first data block corresponding to the A/N field number, which are jointly used to indicate whether the first data block corresponding to the first data block number needs to continue to be sent.
  • the NC block number occupies, for example, 4 bits.
  • the fourth information includes two A/N fields, and each A/N corresponds to an NC block number, which indicates that the fourth information is used to feed back the two NC blocks, such as for Feedback whether the data of the two NC blocks needs to be sent continuously.
  • E may be used to indicate whether the fourth information also includes information of other data blocks. For example, as shown in Figure 15, if the value of the E field after the first NC block number is "0", it can be considered that there is no A/N of other data blocks to report at this time; if the first NC block If the value of the E field after the number is "1", it can be considered that there are A/Ns of other data blocks that need to be reported. It can be understood that the above is an exemplary description, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the correspondence between the value of the E field and information about whether other data blocks are included.
  • R is a reserved field.
  • the second communication device may decide whether to continue sending the data corresponding to the NC block number according to the NC block number and the corresponding A/N. For example, after the second communication device receives the fourth information from the first communication device, if the value of the A/N field corresponding to a certain NC block number is "0", it can be considered as continuing to send the information specified by the NC block number. Corresponding data; if the value of the A/N field corresponding to another NC block number is "1", it can be considered that there is no need to continue sending the data corresponding to the NC block number.
  • the method 1300 further includes: the upper layer of the first communication device determines a value Q according to the K sub-blocks and the number of transport blocks and/or sub-blocks required to decode the first data block, and the value Q is excluding the K sub-blocks The number of transport blocks and/or sub-blocks still needed to decode the first data block; the first communication device sends fifth information to the second communication device, where the fifth information is used to indicate the value Q.
  • Q may be (X1-K).
  • Q if Q is 0, it means that the sending of the sub-block of the first data block is stopped.
  • the fourth information and the fifth information may be carried in the same signaling, or may also be carried in different signalings, which is not limited.
  • the following takes the first control information as DCI, the lower layer as the physical layer, the upper layer as the RLC layer, and the TB identifier as the HARQ process number of the TB as an example, and introduces the data transmission method provided by the embodiment of the present application with reference to FIG. 16 process.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of a data transmission method 1600 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Method 1600 may include the following steps.
  • the first communication device receives N pieces of first control information from the second communication device.
  • the second communication device sends the N pieces of first control information to the first communication device.
  • N may be an integer greater than or equal to 2, for example.
  • the three DCIs are recorded as DCI0, DCI1, and DCI2, wherein DCI0, DCI1, and DCI2 are used to indicate TB0, TB1, and TB2 respectively, and TB0, TB1, and TB2 are used to transmit the same data block (for example, it is recorded as the first Data block) One or more sub-blocks after network coding.
  • the first communication device determines whether the TBs have an association relationship according to whether values of the first information in the N pieces of first control information are the same. For example, each of DCI0, DCI1, and DCI2 includes the first information, and the first information in DCI0, the first information in DCI1, and the first information in DCI2 have the same value, such as DCI0, DCI1 , the values of the first information in DCI2 are all "01". According to the value of the first information in DCI0, DCI1, and DCI2 being the same, the first communication device determines that TB0, TB1, and TB2 indicated by DCI0, DCI1, and DCI2 have an association relationship.
  • the first communication device may also receive other control information.
  • the first communication device may also receive DCI3 from the second communication device.
  • the DCI3 is used to indicate TB3, and TB3 is used to transmit other data (such as other business data, or one or more sub-blocks of other data blocks after network encoding).
  • DCI3 may include first information, and the first communication device may determine whether TB3 has an association relationship with TB0, TB1, and TB2 according to the first information in DCI3.
  • the values of the first information in DCI0, DCI1, and DCI2 are all "01", and the value of the first information in DCI3 is "00", then the first communication device according to the first information in DCI0-DCI2
  • the value of the information is the same, the value of the first information in DCI3 and DCI0, DCI1, DCI2 is different, it can be determined that TB3 has no association relationship with TB0, TB1, TB2.
  • the second communications device sends the M TBs indicated by the N pieces of first control information to the first communications device.
  • the first communications device receives the M TBs.
  • M may be greater than or equal to N.
  • the first communication device receives M TBs according to the N pieces of first control information received in step 1610 .
  • the first communication device receives TB0 indicated by DCI0 according to DCI0, receives TB1 indicated by DCI1 according to DCI1, and receives TB2 indicated by DCI2 according to DCI2.
  • the physical layer of the first communications device performs channel decoding on the M TBs.
  • the physical layer of the first communication device reports to the RLC layer the sub-blocks transmitted by the TB with correct channel decoding among the M TBs.
  • the physical layer of the first communication device may report K sub-blocks to the RLC layer, the K sub-blocks represent sub-blocks transmitted by TBs with correct channel decoding among the M TBs, and K is a positive integer.
  • TB0 and TB2 indicated by DCI0 and DCI2 are correctly decoded on the physical layer channel of the first communication device, and TB1 indicated by DCI1 is decoded incorrectly on the physical layer channel of the first communication device. Therefore, the physical layer channel of the first communication device
  • the layer sends TB0 and TB2 to the MAC layer of the first communication device; the MAC layer of the first communication device demultiplexes the data of TB0 and TB2 to the corresponding logical channel according to the MAC header information of TB0 and TB2.
  • the MAC layer of the first communication device multiplexes the data of TB0 and TB2 onto the logical channel where the first data block is located.
  • the physical layer of the first communication device reports the HARQ process number of at least one TB in the M1 TBs of the K sub-blocks to the RLC layer, and the M1 TBs are the ones with correct channel decoding in the M TBs TB.
  • the MAC layer of the first communication device multiplexes the data in TB0 and TB2, the HARQ process number of TB0, and the HARQ process number of TB2 onto the logical channel where the first data block is located.
  • the physical layer of the first communication device may perform channel decoding on the TB3. Assuming that TB3 indicated by DCI3 is correctly decoded on the physical layer channel of the first communication device, as an example, if TB3 is other data other than a data block, the MAC layer of the first communication device demultiplexes the data in TB3 to the corresponding on the logical channel; if TB3 is the data of other data blocks (that is, one or more sub-blocks used to transmit other data blocks after network coding), the MAC layer of the first communication device will use the data in TB3 and the HARQ of TB3 The process number is reported to the logical channel where the other data block is located. Wherein, the first data block and other data blocks may be located in the same logical channel, or may be located in different logical channels, without limitation.
  • the RLC layer of the first communication device sends the second information to the physical layer.
  • the physical layer of the first communication device receives the second information from the RLC layer.
  • the second information includes the HARQ process number of TB0 and/or the HARQ process number of TB2, and the first communication device determines the HARQ process number of TB0 and/or TB2 according to the second information.
  • Process feedback is ACK.
  • TB0, TB1, and TB2 have an association relationship, so the first communication device determines that the HARQ process feedbacks of TB0, TB1, and TB2 are all ACKs according to the second information and the association relationship.
  • the drx-RetransmissionTimer is no longer enabled.
  • the first communications device sends fourth information to the second communications device.
  • the fourth information is used to notify the second communication device whether to continue sending the data of the first data block.
  • the fourth information reference may be made to the description in method 1300, and details are not repeated here.
  • the method 1600 further includes: the first communication device sending fifth information to the second communication device, where the fifth information is used to indicate the value Q.
  • the fifth information is used to indicate the value Q.
  • the fifth information and the value Q reference may be made to the previous related descriptions, which will not be repeated here.
  • transmission includes receiving and/or sending.
  • transmitting a signal may include receiving a signal and/or sending a signal.
  • network coding is mentioned multiple times.
  • the network code may be any code with an erasure correction function.
  • the network coding method shown in FIG. 9 by performing network coding on the data packet to be transmitted, an extra redundant packet is generated, and then the receiving end receives the data packet and the extra redundant packet, which can be decoded through the network coding ( Or called NC decoding) to recover the lost data.
  • the control information indicates the TB may also be replaced by the control information scheduling the TB.
  • the first communication device may receive the M TBs indicated by the first control information based on the first control information, which means that the first communication device may receive the M TBs scheduled by the first control information based on the first control information , or indicates that the first communication device receives the M TBs scheduled (or indicated) by the first control information.
  • the second information is used to indicate whether the first data block is successfully decoded after the K sub-blocks are decoded by NC as an example for exemplary description, which is not limited.
  • the second information as an example to indicate that the first data block is successfully decoded after K sub-blocks are NC-decoded, as an example, "the second information is used to indicate that the first data block is successfully decoded after K sub-blocks are NC-decoded.” ", may also be replaced by the second information used to indicate that the first data block can be decoded, or may also be replaced by the second information used to indicate that the data of the first data block does not need to be continuously transmitted, and so on.
  • K sub-blocks successfully decoded the first data block after NC decoding was mentioned many times.
  • “K sub-blocks successfully decoded the first data block after NC decoding” can also be replaced with "the first data block can be successfully decoded after K sub-blocks are decoded by NC”, or it can also be replaced by "the first data block can be successfully decoded after K sub-blocks are decoded by NC", or it can also be Replace with "the first data block can be decoded” and so on.
  • first communication device can be replaced by a receiving end device
  • second communication device may be replaced by a sender device
  • the receiving end device may be a terminal device or a network device
  • the sending end device may also be a terminal device or a network device.
  • first communication device may be replaced with “terminal device”
  • second communication device may be replaced with "network device”.
  • the methods and operations implemented by the communication device may also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) of the communication device.
  • the embodiments of the present application further provide corresponding devices, and the device includes corresponding modules for executing the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the module can be software, or hardware, or a combination of software and hardware. It can be understood that the technical features described in the above method embodiments are also applicable to the following device embodiments.
  • Fig. 17 is a schematic block diagram of a data transmission device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus 1700 includes a transceiving unit 1710 .
  • the transceiver unit 1710 may be used to implement corresponding communication functions.
  • the transceiver unit 1710 may also be called a communication interface or a communication unit.
  • the apparatus 1700 further includes a processing unit 1720 .
  • the processing unit 1720 can be used for data processing.
  • the device 1700 further includes a storage unit, which can be used to store instructions and/or data, and the processing unit 1720 can read the instructions and/or data in the storage unit, so that the device implements the foregoing method embodiments actions of communication devices.
  • a storage unit which can be used to store instructions and/or data
  • the processing unit 1720 can read the instructions and/or data in the storage unit, so that the device implements the foregoing method embodiments actions of communication devices.
  • the apparatus 1700 may be the first communication device in the foregoing embodiments, or may be a component (such as a chip) of the first communication device.
  • the apparatus 1700 can implement the steps or procedures corresponding to the execution of the first communication device in the method embodiment above, wherein the transceiver unit 1710 can be used to perform operations related to the sending and receiving of the first communication device in the method embodiment above, and the processing unit Step 1720 may be used to perform operations related to the processing of the first communications device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the transceiver unit 1710 is configured to receive N pieces of first control information, where the N pieces of first control information are used to indicate M transmission blocks, and the N pieces of first control information are used to indicate that the M transmission blocks are used for Transmitting one or more sub-blocks of the first data block after network coding NC, where N and M are positive integers, and M is greater than or equal to N; the transceiver unit 1710 is also configured to receive M pieces of first control information based on N pieces of transport block.
  • each of the one or more pieces of first control information in the N pieces of first control information includes first information, and the one or more pieces of first information included in the one or more pieces of first control information are used to indicate M transmission
  • the block is used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block after passing through the NC, wherein one or more pieces of first information satisfy a preset condition.
  • each of the N pieces of first control information includes first information, and the N pieces of first information included in the N pieces of first control information are used to indicate that M transport blocks are used to transmit the first One or more sub-blocks after the data block passes through the NC, wherein the values of the N pieces of first information are the same.
  • the transceiver unit 1710 is further configured to send K sub-blocks to the upper layer of the first communication device, where the K sub-blocks are sub-blocks transmitted by a transport block with correct channel decoding among the M transport blocks, and K is a positive integer;
  • the transceiver unit 1710 is further configured to send second information to a lower layer of the first communication device, where the second information is used to indicate whether the first data block is successfully decoded after the K sub-blocks are decoded by NC.
  • the second information is used to indicate that the first data block is successfully decoded
  • the processing unit 1720 is configured to determine M transport blocks according to the second information when at least one of the transport blocks is not channel-decoded correctly.
  • the response information of all hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ processes of the transport block is an acknowledgment ACK.
  • the second information is used to indicate successful decoding of the first data block, and the second information includes an identifier of at least one of the M1 transport blocks used to transmit the K sub-blocks, where the M1 transport blocks are M transport blocks Transport block with correct channel decoding, M1 is a positive integer.
  • the processing unit 1720 is configured to determine the identifiers of the M transport blocks according to the identifier and the association relationship of the at least one transport block.
  • the transceiving unit 1710 is further configured to send third information to a high layer of the first communication device, where the third information is used to indicate an identifier of at least one transport block in the M1 transport blocks.
  • the processing unit 1720 is configured to determine the identifiers of the M transmission blocks according to the preset identifier and the logical channel and/or wireless data bearer corresponding to the first data block, wherein the logical channel corresponding to the first data block And/or the wireless data bearer is used to transmit the transmission block corresponding to the preset identifier, where the preset identifier includes identifiers of M transmission blocks.
  • the transceiving unit 1710 is further configured to acquire information of preset identifiers, where the information of preset identifiers includes: a start identifier, an end identifier, and the number of identifiers.
  • the identifier of the transport block is the HARQ process number of the transport block or the index of the transport block.
  • the processing unit 1720 is configured to stop receiving and/or stop decoding the transport block used to transmit the first data block; and/or stop receiving or stopping monitoring the second control information, the second control information is used to indicate M The retransmission of at least one transport block among the transport blocks; wherein, the K sub-blocks are the sub-blocks transmitted by the transport block whose channel decoding is correct among the M transport blocks, and K is a positive integer.
  • the transceiver unit 1710 is further configured to receive X pieces of third control information, where the X pieces of third control information are used to indicate L transport blocks, where X and L are positive integers, and L is greater than or equal to X; if The L transmission blocks and the M transmission blocks are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block after passing through the NC, and the processing unit 1720 is configured to stop receiving and/or stop decoding the L transmission blocks.
  • the transceiver unit 1710 is further configured to receive first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure timers corresponding to the HARQ processes of the L transport blocks, where the timing corresponding to the HARQ processes of the L transport blocks.
  • the device is used to indicate that the physical control channel indicates a new transmission duration for the medium access control MAC entity, and/or, the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of L transmission blocks includes drx-InacvitityTimer; and/or, L transmission blocks
  • the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of the block is used to indicate the start duration of the discontinuous reception DRX, and/or, the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of the L transport blocks includes drx-onDurationTimer.
  • the processing unit 1720 is configured to stop or disable the timers corresponding to the HARQ processes of the L transport blocks.
  • the transceiver unit 1710 is further configured to receive second configuration information, the second configuration information is used to configure timers corresponding to the HARQ processes of M transport blocks, and the timers corresponding to the HARQ processes of M transport blocks are used for Indicates the maximum duration of waiting for the retransmission corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks, and/or, the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks includes drx-RetransmissionTimer; and/or, the HARQ of M transport blocks
  • the timer corresponding to the process is used to indicate the minimum duration that the MAC entity expects to receive the HARQ retransmission allocation, and/or, the timer corresponding to the HARQ process of M transport blocks includes drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer.
  • the processing unit 1720 is configured to stop or disable the timers corresponding to the HARQ processes of the M transport blocks.
  • the processing unit 1720 is configured to start a timer corresponding to a HARQ process of a retransmitted transport block among the M transport blocks if the first data block is not successfully decoded.
  • the processing unit 1720 is configured to start the timer drx-RetransmissionTimer corresponding to the HARQ process of the retransmitted transport block among the M transport blocks in the next adjacent time unit after the drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer expires .
  • the transceiving unit 1710 is further configured to send fourth information to the second communication device, where the fourth information is used to notify the second communication device whether to continue sending sub-blocks of the first data block.
  • the fourth information is used to notify the second communication device to stop sending sub-blocks of the first data block.
  • the fourth information includes an index of the first data block and/or indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the fourth information contains information of other first data blocks; or, the fourth information is used to indicate Number of transport blocks and/or sub-blocks required for the first data block.
  • the transceiver unit 1710 is further configured to send K sub-blocks to the upper layer of the first communication device, where the K sub-blocks are sub-blocks transmitted by a transport block with correct channel decoding among the M transport blocks, and K is a positive integer;
  • the processing unit 1720 is configured to determine a value Q according to the K sub-blocks and the number of transport blocks and/or sub-blocks required for decoding the first data block, the value Q being required for decoding the first data block in addition to the K sub-blocks The number of transmission blocks and/or sub-blocks; the transceiver unit 1710 is further configured to send fifth information to the second communication device, where the fifth information is used to indicate the value Q.
  • the upper layer of the first communication device is a radio link control RLC layer, packet data convergence protocol PDCP layer, media access control MAC layer or NC layer; and/or, the lower layer of the first communication device is a physical PHY layer.
  • N is an integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • the apparatus 1700 can implement the steps or processes corresponding to the first communication device in the method embodiment according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus 1700 may be the second communication device in the foregoing embodiments, or may be a component (such as a chip) of the second communication device.
  • the apparatus 1700 can implement the steps or procedures corresponding to the execution of the second communication device in the above method embodiment, wherein the transceiver unit 1710 can be used to perform operations related to the transmission and reception of the second communication device in the above method embodiment, and the processing unit Step 1720 may be used to perform operations related to the processing of the second communication device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the transceiver unit 1710 is configured to send N pieces of first control information to the first communication device, where the N pieces of first control information are used to indicate M transmission blocks, and the N pieces of first control information are used to indicate M
  • the transmission blocks have an association relationship, and the association relationship is used to indicate that M transmission blocks are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block after network coding NC, where N and M are positive integers, and M is greater than or equal to N ;
  • the transceiver unit 1710 is further configured to send M transmission blocks to the first communication device.
  • one or more pieces of first control information in the N pieces of first control information include first information, and the first information included in the one or more pieces of first control information is used to indicate that the M transport blocks have an association relationship.
  • each of the N pieces of first control information includes first information, and when the values of the N pieces of first information included in the N pieces of first control information are the same, the M transport blocks have an association relationship .
  • the transceiving unit 1710 is further configured to receive fourth information from the first communication device, where the fourth information is used to notify the second communication device whether to continue sending sub-blocks of the first data block.
  • the fourth information includes an index of the first data block and/or indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the fourth information contains information of other data blocks; or, the fourth information is used to indicate the information used to decode the first data block The number of transport blocks and/or sub-blocks required for the data block.
  • N is an integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • the transceiver unit 1710 is further configured to receive fifth information from the first communication device, where the fifth information is used to indicate a value Q, and the value Q is a transport block required for decoding the first data block in addition to the K sub-blocks and/or the number of sub-blocks, the K sub-blocks are the sub-blocks transmitted by the transport block with correct channel decoding among the M transport blocks, and K is a positive integer.
  • the apparatus 1700 can implement the steps or processes corresponding to the execution of the second communication device in the method embodiment according to the embodiment of the present application, and the apparatus 1700 can include a method for performing the second communication in the embodiments shown in FIG. 12 to FIG. 16 A unit of a method performed by a device.
  • the apparatus 1700 here is embodied in the form of functional units.
  • the term "unit” here may refer to an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), an electronic circuit, a processor for executing one or more software or firmware programs (such as a shared processor, a dedicated processor, or a group processor, etc.) and memory, incorporated logic, and/or other suitable components to support the described functionality.
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • the apparatus 1700 can be specifically the communication device (such as the first communication device, or the second communication device) in the above-mentioned embodiments, and can be used to execute the above-mentioned method embodiments In order to avoid repetition, the various processes and/or steps corresponding to the communication device are not repeated here.
  • the apparatus 1700 in each of the above solutions has the function of implementing the corresponding steps performed by the communication device (such as the first communication device, or the second communication device) in the above method.
  • the functions described above may be implemented by hardware, or may be implemented by executing corresponding software on the hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions; for example, the transceiver unit can be replaced by a transceiver (for example, the sending unit in the transceiver unit can be replaced by a transmitter, and the receiving unit in the transceiver unit can be replaced by a receiver computer), and other units, such as a processing unit, may be replaced by a processor to respectively perform the sending and receiving operations and related processing operations in each method embodiment.
  • the transceiver unit 1710 may also be a transceiver circuit (for example, may include a receiving circuit and a sending circuit), and the processing unit may be a processing circuit.
  • the apparatus in FIG. 17 may be the device in the foregoing embodiments, or may be a chip or a chip system, such as a system on chip (system on chip, SoC).
  • the transceiver unit may be an input-output circuit or a communication interface;
  • the processing unit is a processor or a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip. It is not limited here.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic block diagram of another data transmission device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 1800 includes a first module 1870 and a second module 1820 .
  • the first module 1870 may be, for example, a low-layer module, such as a physical layer module.
  • the first module 1870 may be configured to perform the operations performed by the lower layer on the side of the communication device (such as the first communication device) in the above method embodiments.
  • the second module 1820 may be, for example, a high-level module, such as a module realizing NC functions.
  • the first module 1870 and the second module 1820 can be integrated together, or can also be set separately.
  • the second module 1820 may be configured to perform the operations performed by the high layer on the side of the communication device (such as the first communication device) in the above method embodiments.
  • the first communication device receives M transmission blocks from the second communication device, and the M transmission blocks are used to transmit one or more sub-blocks of the first data block after network coding NC, where M is positive Integer; the first module 1870 is used to send K sub-blocks to the second module 1820, and the K sub-blocks are the sub-blocks transmitted by the correct channel decoding of the M transmission blocks, and K is a positive integer; the first module 1870 also It is used to receive the second information from the second module 1820, the second information is used to indicate whether the first data block is successfully decoded after the K sub-blocks undergo NC decoding.
  • M positive Integer
  • the first module 1870 is used to send K sub-blocks to the second module 1820, and the K sub-blocks are the sub-blocks transmitted by the correct channel decoding of the M transmission blocks, and K is a positive integer
  • the first module 1870 also It is used to receive the second information from the second module 1820, the second information is used to indicate whether the first data
  • Fig. 19 is a schematic block diagram of another data transmission device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 1900 includes a processor 1980, the processor 1980 is coupled with a memory 1920, the memory 1920 is used for storing computer programs or instructions and/or data, and the processor 1980 is used for executing the computer programs or instructions stored in the memory 1920, or reading the memory 1920
  • the stored data is used to execute the methods in the above method embodiments.
  • processors 1980 there are one or more processors 1980 .
  • the memory 1920 is integrated with the processor 1980, or is set separately.
  • the device 1900 further includes a transceiver 1930 for receiving and/or sending signals.
  • the processor 1980 is configured to control the transceiver 1930 to receive and/or send signals.
  • the apparatus 1900 is used to implement the operations performed by the device (such as the first communication device, or the second communication device) in each of the above method embodiments.
  • processors mentioned in the embodiment of the present application may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and may also be other general purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processor, DSP), application specific integrated circuits ( application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, or the processor may be any conventional processor, or the like.
  • the memory mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory and/or a nonvolatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically programmable Erases programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM).
  • RAM random access memory
  • RAM can be used as an external cache.
  • RAM includes the following multiple forms: static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), Double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct Memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM).
  • the processor is a general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, or discrete hardware components
  • the memory storage module may be integrated in the processor.
  • memories described herein are intended to include, but are not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memories.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, on which computer instructions for implementing the methods performed by the device (such as the first communication device, or the second communication device) in the above method embodiments are stored.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, including instructions, which, when executed by a computer, implement the methods performed by the devices (such as the first communication device, or the second communication device) in the above method embodiments.
  • the disclosed devices and methods may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components can be combined or May be integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wired (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the available medium may be a magnetic medium (such as a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (such as a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (SSD), etc.
  • a magnetic medium such as a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape
  • an optical medium such as a DVD
  • a semiconductor medium such as a solid state disk (SSD), etc.
  • the above-mentioned available medium includes but Not limited to: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Detection And Prevention Of Errors In Transmission (AREA)

Abstract

本申请实施例提供了一种数据传输的方法和装置。该方法可以包括：第一通信设备接收N个第一控制信息，该N个第一控制信息用于指示M个传输块用于传输同一个数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块，其中，N、M为正整数，且M大于或等于N；第一通信设备基于N个第一控制信息接收该M个传输块。通过本申请，不仅可以实现通过采用网络编码方式尽可能地满足业务对时延的要求，还可以建立传输块与数据块之间的联系，从而可以获知数据块对应哪些传输块，进而可以实现基于该数据块的网络编码译码的情况，确定该数据块对应的多个传输块的反馈信息。

Description

数据传输的方法和装置
本申请要求于2022年01月08日提交中国专利局、申请号为202210017417.3、申请名称为“数据传输的方法和装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，以及2021年12月03日提交中国专利局、申请号为202111466465.2、申请名称为“一种XR业务的指示方法”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请实施例涉及通信领域，尤其涉及一种数据传输的方法和装置。
背景技术
在空口传输的过程中，可能会出现传输比特出错或者丢包的情况，通过混合自动重传请求(hybrid automatic repeat request，HARQ)机制可以提高空口传输的鲁棒性。举例来说，发送端发送一个传输块(transport block，TB)后，停下来等待确认信息；接收端可以使用1比特的信息对该传输块进行肯定应答(acknowledgement，ACK)或否定应答(negative acknowledgement，NACK)；接收端在收到ACK后再发送下一个TB。
某些业务，如扩展现实(extended reality，XR)业务对带宽和时延具有较高的要求。因此，可以采用网络编码的方式来尽可能地满足XR业务对带宽和时延的要求。那么如何将网络编码的方式与上述HARQ机制有效结合，是亟需解决的问题。
发明内容
本申请提供一种数据传输的方法和装置，以期能够将网络编码的方式与HARQ机制有效结合，提升传输的可靠性，降低传输时延，提高用户体验。
第一方面，提供了一种数据传输的方法，该方法可以由通信设备执行，或者，也可以由通信设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)执行，对此不作限定，为了便于描述，下面以由第一通信设备执行为例进行说明。
该方法可以包括：第一通信设备接收N个第一控制信息，N个第一控制信息用于指示M个传输块，N个第一控制信息还用于指示M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码NC后的一个或多个子块，其中，N、M为正整数，且M大于或等于N；第一通信设备基于N个第一控制信息接收M个传输块。
基于上述技术方案，第一通信设备根据N个第一控制信息获知该N个第一控制信息所指示的M个传输块用于传输同一个数据块(即第一数据块)经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块。这样通过对第一数据块采用网络编码方式，在某些场景下，如M个传输块中某些传输块未信道译码正确的场景下，第一通信设备也可能基于信道译码正确的传输块成功解码第一数据块，进而不需要再重传未信道译码正确的传输块，降低重传带来的时延，可以尽可能地满足业务对时延的要求。此外，通过建立传输块与第一数据块之间的联系，可 以获知第一数据块对应哪些传输块，进而可以实现基于该第一数据块的NC译码的情况，确定该第一数据块对应的多个传输块的反馈信息。举例来说，若经过NC译码后可成功解码第一数据块，那么即使M个传输块中部分传输块未信道译码正确，第一通信设备也可以不再需要通过重传重新接收未信道译码正确的传输块，由此，在第一数据块被成功解码后，第一通信设备可以将该M个传输块的所有HARQ进程号设置为ACK，使得无需进行重传。从而减少了不必要的重传，降低了数据传输时延，提高了用户体验。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，N个第一控制信息中的一个或多个第一控制信息各自包括第一信息，一个或多个第一控制信息中包括的一个或多个第一信息用于指示M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块，其中，一个或多个第一信息满足预设条件。
一示例，N个第一控制信息中的每个第一控制信息都包括第一信息，N个第一控制信息中包括的N个第一信息用于指示M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块。例如，该N个第一信息满足预设条件(如该N个第一信息的取值满足一定的规律，或者取值为预设取值范围内的值，或者取值相同)时，该M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块。
又一示例，N个第一控制信息中的部分第一控制信息都包括第一信息，N个第一控制信息中包括的部分第一信息用于指示M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块。例如，N个第一控制信息中的第一个第一控制信息包括第一信息，以及最后一个第一控制信息包括第一信息，那么该第一个第一控制信息和最后一个第一控制信息中的第一信息满足预设条件(如两个第一信息的取值满足一定的规律，或者取值为预设取值范围内的值，或者取值相同)时，该M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，N个第一控制信息中的每个第一控制信息都包括第一信息，N个第一控制信息中包括的N个第一信息用于指示M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块，其中，N个第一信息的取值相同。
基于该实现方式，每个第一控制信息中包括第一信息，若不同第一控制信息中的该第一信息的取值相同，则认为该不同第一控制信息指示的传输块用于传输同一个数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块；若不同第一控制信息中的该第一信息的取值不同，则认为该不同第一控制信息指示的传输块传输的经过NC后的一个或多个子块不属于同一数据块。
基于上述技术方案，第一通信设备可以通过第一控制信息判断M个传输块是否用于传输同一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块，即可以通过第一控制信息判断M个传输块传输的经过NC后的一个或多个子块是否属于同一数据块。或者，第一通信设备在接收到多个第一控制信息之后，能够根据多个第一控制信息确定出哪些传输块传输的经过NC后的多个子块是属于同一个数据块的。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备基于所述N个第一控制信息接收所述M个传输块之后，方法还包括：第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层发送K个子块，K个子块为M个传输块中信道译码正确的传输块所传输的子块，K为正整数；第一通信设备的高层对K个子块进行NC译码，并根据NC译码的结果向第一通信设备的低层发送第二信息，第二信息用于指示在K个子块经过NC译码后第一数据块是 否被成功解码。
可选地，K大于或等于预设阈值时，K个子块经过NC译码后第一数据块能够被成功解码。
基于上述技术方案，第一通信设备的低层向高层发送信道译码正确的传输块传输K个子块，若第一通信设备的高层通过K个子块可成功解码第一数据块，则第一通信设备的高层可以通知低层，进而低层根据该通知可获知不需要执行与该第一数据块相关的操作，例如不需要重传M个传输块中的传输块，再例如不需要再继续接收和/或不需要解码用于传输该第一数据块的传输块，等等。或者，若第一通信设备的高层通过K个子块未成功解码第一数据块，则第一通信设备的高层可以通知低层，低层根据该通知可获知通过K个子块未成功解码第一数据块。通过该方式，可以减少空口资源的浪费，降低功耗开销。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第二信息用于指示成功解码第一数据块，方法还包括：在M个传输块中至少一个传输块未信道译码正确的情况下，第一通信设备的低层根据第二信息，确定M个传输块的所有混合自动重传请求HARQ进程的应答信息为肯定应答ACK。
基于上述技术方案，第一通信设备的低层收到第二信息后，若第二信息用于指示第一数据块已被成功解码，则可以确定M个传输块的所有混合自动重传请求HARQ进程的应答信息为肯定应答ACK。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第二信息用于指示成功解码第一数据块，第二信息包括用于传输K个子块的M1个传输块中至少一个传输块的标识，M1个传输块为M个传输块中信道译码正确的传输块，M1为正整数。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备根据M1个传输块中至少一个传输块的标识，确定M个传输块的标识。
基于上述技术方案，第二信息中可以包括M1个传输块中至少一个传输块的标识，这样第一通信设备的低层可以根据该M1个传输块中至少一个传输块的标识，确定该M个传输块的标识。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，在第一通信设备的高层向第一通信设备的低层发送第二信息之前，方法还包括：第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层发送第三信息，第三信息用于指示M1个传输块中至少一个传输块的标识。
基于上述技术方案，第一通信设备的低层可以向第一通信设备的高层上报M1个传输块中至少一个传输块的标识，进而高层可以获知M1个传输块中至少一个传输块的标识。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第二信息用于指示成功解码第一数据块，方法还包括：第一通信设备根据预设标识和第一数据块所对应的逻辑信道和/或无线数据承载，确定M个传输块的标识，其中，第一数据块所对应的逻辑信道和/或无线数据承载用于传输预设标识对应的传输块，预设标识包括M个传输块的标识。
可选地，N个第一控制信息用于指示M个传输块的标识，该M个传输块的标识属于预设标识。
基于上述技术方案，可以通过辑信道和/或无线数据承载绑定预设标识的方式，建立传输块标识和第一数据块之间的关系。这样，第一通信设备根据预设标识和第一数据块所对应的逻辑信道和/或无线数据承载，确定M个传输块的标识。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备获取预设标识的信息，预设标识的信息包括：起始标识、结束标识、标识的数量。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，传输块的标识为传输块的HARQ进程号或传输块的索引。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，在成功解码第一数据块的情况下，方法还包括：第一通信设备停止接收和/或停止解码用于传输第一数据块的传输块；和/或，第一通信设备停止接收或停止监测第二控制信息，第二控制信息用于指示M个传输块中的至少一个传输块的重传。
基于上述技术方案，在成功解码第一数据块的情况下，第一通信设备可以停止接收和/或停止解码用于传输第一数据块的传输块；和/或，第一通信设备可以停止接收或停止监测第二控制信息，从而节省开销。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备接收X个第三控制信息，X个第三控制信息用于指示L个传输块，其中，X、L为正整数，且L大于或等于X；第一通信设备停止接收和/或停止解码用于传输第一数据块的传输块，包括：若L个传输块与M个传输块用于传输同一个数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块，则第一通信设备停止接收和/或停止解码L个传输块。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备接收第一配置信息，第一配置信息用于配置L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，其中，L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示物理控制信道为媒体接入控制MAC实体指示一个新传后的持续时间，和/或，L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器包括drx-InacvitityTimer。示例地，第一通信设备在上述持续时间内监测控制信息(例如，第一通信设备在上述持续时间内监测第三控制信息)，若第一通信设备在持续时间内监测到控制信息，则第一通信设备重新开启该L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备接收第一配置信息，第一配置信息用于配置L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，其中，L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示不连续接收DRX开始的持续时间，和/或，L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器为drx-onDurationTimer。示例地，第一通信设备在上述持续时间内监测控制信息，若第一通信设备在持续时间内监测到控制信息(例如，第一通信设备在上述持续时间内监测第三控制信息)，则第一通信设备重新开启该L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备停止接收和/或停止解码L个传输块，包括：第一通信设备停止或关闭L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备接收第二配置信息，第二配置信息用于配置M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示等待M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的重传的最大持续时间，和/或，M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器为drx-RetransmissionTimer。示例地，第一通信设备在上述最大持续时间内监测指示(或者称调度)M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的重传的控制信息(例如，第一通信设备在上 述最大持续时间内监测第二控制信息)。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备接收第二配置信息，第二配置信息用于配置M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示MAC实体期望接收HARQ重传分配的最小持续时间，和/或，M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器为drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备停止接收或停止监测第二控制信息，方法还包括：第一通信设备停止或关闭M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：在未成功解码第一数据块的情况下，第一通信设备开启M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备开启M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，包括：在M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer超时后的下一个相邻时间单元，第一通信设备开启M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器drx-RetransmissionTimer。
基于上述技术方案，可以根据在M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer超时，第一通信设备开启M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器drx-RetransmissionTimer；其中，drx-RetransmissionTimer的开启时刻所在的第一时间单元晚于drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer超时所在的第二时间单元，第一时间单元与第二时间单元相邻。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备基于N个第一控制信息接收M个传输块之后，方法还包括：第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第四信息，第四信息用于通知第二通信设备是否继续发送第一数据块的子块。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，在成功解码第一数据块的情况下，第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第四信息，第四信息用于通知第二通信设备停止发送第一数据块的子块。
基于上述技术方案，在K个子块经过NC译码后、第一数据块被成功解码的情况下，如果第二通信设备继续发送该第一数据块的数据，不仅无助于第一通信设备的解码，还会占用空口资源，导致空口资源的浪费。因此，在K个子块经过NC译码后第一数据块被成功解码的情况下(如第一通信设备的低层收到第二信息，且第二信息用于指示第一数据块被成功解码)，第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第四信息，用于通知停止发送该第一数据块的数据，节省空口资源。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第四信息包括第一数据块的索引和/或指示信息，指示信息用于指示第四信息是否包含其他数据块的信息；或者，第四信息用于指示用于译码第一数据块还所需要的传输块和/或子块的数量。例如：当第四信息指示用于译码第一数据块还需要的传输块和/或子块的数量为0时，表示不再需要第一数据块的数据，即第二通信设备可以停止发送第一数据块的数据。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备基于N个第一控制信息接收M个传输块之后，方法还包括：第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层发送K 个子块，K个子块为M个传输块中信道译码正确的传输块所传输的子块，K为正整数；第一通信设备的高层根据K个子块和译码第一数据块所需的传输块和/或子块的数量确定数值Q，数值Q为除了K个子块以外译码第一数据块还需要的传输块和/或子块数量；第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第五信息，第五信息用于指示数值Q。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备的高层为无线链路控制RLC层、分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层、媒体介入控制MAC层或NC层；和/或，第一通信设备的低层为物理PHY层。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，N为大于或等于2的整数。
第二方面，提供了一种数据传输的方法，该方法可以由通信设备执行，或者，也可以由通信设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)执行，对此不作限定，为了便于描述，下面以由第一通信设备执行为例进行说明。
该方法可以包括：第一通信设备接收来自第二通信设备的M个传输块，M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码NC后的一个或多个子块，其中，M为正整数；第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层发送K个子块，K个子块为M个传输块中信道译码正确的传输块所传输的子块，K为正整数；所述第一通信设备的高层对所述K个子块进行NC译码，并基于NC译码的结果向第一通信设备的低层发送第二信息，第二信息用于指示第一数据块是否被成功解码。
基于上述技术方案，第一通信设备的低层(如物理层)接收来自第二通信设备的M个传输块，该M个传输块传输同一数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块；若第一通信设备的低层对M个传输块中的M1个传输块信道译码正确，则第一通信设备的低层向高层发送M1个传输块所传输的K个子块；若第一通信设备的高层通过K个子块可成功解码第一数据块，则第一通信设备的高层可以向低层发送通知信息，低层根据该通知信息可获知不需要执行与该第一数据块相关的操作，例如不需要请求M个传输块中除M1个传输块以外的传输块的重传，再例如不需要再接收和/或不需要再解码用于传输该第一数据块的传输块，等等。通过该方式，可以减少空口资源的浪费，降低功耗开销此外，若第一通信设备的高层在接收到K个子块后未成功解码第一数据块，则第一通信设备的高层也可以向低层发送通知信息，低层根据该通知信息可获知第一数据块未被成功解码或者可获知通过K个子块未成功解码第一数据块，进而第一通信设备可以继续请求第二通信设备传输第一数据块的子块，或者可以执行正常的重传等操作。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，第二信息用于指示成功解码第一数据块，方法还包括：第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送反馈信息，反馈信息用于表征M个传输块传输成功，或者，反馈信息用于表征第一数据块传输成功。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备接收N个第一控制信息，N个第一控制信息用于指示M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，N个第一控制信息中的一个或多个第一控制信息各自包括第一信息，一个或多个第一控制信息中包括的一个或多个第一信息用于指示M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块，其中，一个或多个第一信息满足预设条件。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，N个第一控制信息中的每个第一控制信息都包括第一信息，N个第一控制信息中包括的N个第一信息用于指示M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块，其中，N个第一信息的取值相同。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，第二信息用于指示成功解码第一数据块，方法还包括：在M个传输块中至少一个传输块未信道译码正确的情况下，第一通信设备的低层根据第二信息，确定M个传输块的所有HARQ进程的应答信息为ACK。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，第二信息用于指示成功解码第一数据块，第二信息包括用于传输K个子块的M1个传输块中至少一个传输块的标识，M1个传输块为M个传输块中信道译码正确的传输块，M1为正整数。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备根据M1个传输块中至少一个传输块的标识，确定M个传输块的标识。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备的低层接收来自第一通信设备的高层的第二信息之前，方法还包括：第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层发送第三信息，第三信息用于指示M1个传输块中至少一个传输块的标识。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，第二信息用于指示成功解码第一数据块，方法还包括：第一通信设备根据预设标识和第一数据块所对应的逻辑信道和/或无线数据承载，确定M个传输块的标识，其中，第一数据块所对应的逻辑信道和/或无线数据承载用于传输预设标识对应的传输块，预设标识包括M个传输块的标识。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备获取预设标识的信息，预设标识的信息包括：起始标识、结束标识、标识的数量。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，标识为传输块的HARQ进程号或传输块的索引。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，在成功解码第一数据块的情况下，方法还包括：第一通信设备停止接收和/或停止解码用于传输第一数据块的传输块；和/或，第一通信设备停止接收或停止监测第二控制信息，第二控制信息用于指示M个传输块中的至少一个传输块的重传。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备接收X个第三控制信息，X个第三控制信息用于指示L个传输块，其中，X、L为正整数，且L大于或等于X；第一通信设备停止接收和/或停止解码用于传输第一数据块的传输块，包括：若L个传输块与M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块，则第一通信设备停止接收和/或停止解码L个传输块。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备接收第一配置信息，第一配置信息用于配置L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示物理控制信道为媒体接入控制MAC实体指示一个新传后的持续时间，和/或，L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器为drx-InacvitityTimer。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备接收第一配置信息，第一配置信息用于配置L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示不连续接收DRX开始的持续时间，和/或，L个 传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器为drx-onDurationTimer。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备停止接收和/或停止解码L个传输块，包括：第一通信设备停止或关闭L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备接收第二配置信息，第二配置信息用于配置M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示等待M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的重传的最大持续时间，和/或，M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器包括drx-RetransmissionTimer。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备接收第二配置信息，第二配置信息用于配置M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示MAC实体期望接收HARQ重传分配的最小持续时间，和/或，M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器包括drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备停止接收或停止监测第二控制信息，包括：第一通信设备停止或关闭M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：若未成功解码第一数据块，则第一通信设备开启M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备开启M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，包括：在M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer超时后的下一个相邻时间单元，第一通信设备开启M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器drx-RetransmissionTimer。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第四信息，第四信息用于通知第二通信设备是否继续发送第一数据块的子块。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，第四信息包括第一数据块的索引和/或指示信息，指示信息用于指示第四信息是否包含其他数据块的信息；或者，第四信息用于指示用于译码第一数据块所需的传输块和/或子块的数量。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备的高层根据K个子块和译码第一数据块所需的传输块和/或子块的数量确定数值Q，数值Q为除了K个子块以外译码第一数据块还需要的传输块和/或子块数量；第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第五信息，第五信息用于指示数值Q。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备的高层为无线链路控制RLC层、分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层、媒体介入控制MAC层或NC层；和/或，第一通信设备的低层为物理PHY层。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，N为大于或等于2的整数。
第二方面及各个可能的设计的有益效果可以参考第一方面相关的描述，在此不予赘述。
第三方面，提供了一种数据传输的方法，该方法可以由通信设备执行，或者，也可以由通信设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)执行，对此不作限定，为了便于描述，下面以由第一通信设备执行为例进行说明。
该方法可以包括：第一通信设备接收来自第二通信设备的M个传输块，M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码NC后的一个或多个子块，其中，M为正整数；第一通信设备确定M个传输块中的M1个传输块信道译码正确，且在K个子块经过NC译码后第一数据块被成功解码，K个子块为M1个传输块所传输的子块，M1为大于1或等于1、且小于M的整数，K为正整数；第一通信设备确定M个传输块的所有HARQ进程的应答信息为ACK，或者，第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送反馈信息；其中，反馈信息用于表征M个传输块传输成功，或者，反馈信息用于表征第一数据块传输成功。
基于上述技术方案，第一通信设备接收来自第二通信设备的M个传输块，该M个传输块传输同一数据块据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块；若M个传输块中的M1个传输块信道译码正确，且通过该M1个传输块所传输的K个子块可成功解码第一数据块，则第一通信设备第一通信设备确定M个传输块的所有HARQ进程的应答信息为ACK，即使M个传输块中除M1个传输块以外的传输块信道译码不正确，也同样进行肯定应答，进而不需要请求M个传输块中除M1个传输块以外的传输块的重传。通过该方式，可以减少空口资源的浪费，降低功耗开销。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备接收N个第一控制信息，N个第一控制信息用于指示M个传输块，N个第一控制信息用于指示M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，N个第一控制信息中的一个或多个第一控制信息各自包括第一信息，一个或多个第一控制信息中包括的一个或多个第一信息用于指示M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块，其中，一个或多个第一信息满足预设条件。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，N个第一控制信息中的每个第一控制信息都包括第一信息，N个第一控制信息中包括的N个第一信息用于指示M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块，其中N个第一信息的取值相同。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备确定M个传输块的所有HARQ进程的应答信息为ACK，包括：第一通信设备根据第二信息，确定M个传输块的所有HARQ进程的应答信息为ACK。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备停止接收和/或停止解码用于传输第一数据块的传输块；和/或，第一通信设备停止接收或停止监测第二控制信息，第二控制信息用于指示M个传输块中的至少一个传输块的重传；其中，K个子块为M个传输块中信道译码正确的传输块所传输的子块，K为正整数。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备接收X个第三控制信息，X个第三控制信息用于指示L个传输块，其中，X、L为正整数，且L大于或等于X；第一通信设备停止接收和/或停止解码用于传输第一数据块的传输块，包括：若L个传输块与M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块，则第一通信设备停止接收和/或停止解码L个传输块。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备接收第一配置信息，第一配置信息用于配置L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示物理控制信道为媒体接入控制MAC实体指示一 个新传后的持续时间，和/或，L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器为drx-InacvitityTimer。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备接收第一配置信息，第一配置信息用于配置L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示不连续接收DRX开始的持续时间，和/或，L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器为drx-onDurationTimer。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备停止接收和/或停止解码L个传输块，包括：第一通信设备停止或关闭L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备接收第二配置信息，第二配置信息用于配置M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示等待M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的重传的最大持续时间，和/或，M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器包括drx-RetransmissionTimer。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备接收第二配置信息，第二配置信息用于配置M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示MAC实体期望接收HARQ重传分配的最小持续时间，和/或，M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器包括drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备停止接收或停止监测第二控制信息，包括：第一通信设备停止或关闭M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：在未成功解码第一数据块的情况下，第一通信设备开启M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备开启M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，包括：在M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer超时后的下一个相邻时间单元，第一通信设备开启M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器drx-RetransmissionTimer。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第四信息，第四信息用于通知第二通信设备是否继续发送第一数据块的子块。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，第四信息包括第一数据块的索引和/或指示信息，指示信息用于指示第四信息是否包含其他数据块的信息；或者，第四信息用于指示用于译码第一数据块所需的传输块和/或子块的数量。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，第一通信设备接收M个传输块之后，方法还包括：第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层发送K个子块，K个子块为M个传输块中信道译码正确的传输块所传输的子块，K为正整数；第一通信设备的高层根据K个子块和译码第一数据块所需的传输块和/或子块的数量确定数值Q，数值Q为除了K个子块以外译码第一数据块还需要的传输块和/或子块数量；第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第五信息，第五信息用于指示数值Q。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，N为大于或等于2的整数。
第三方面及各个可能的设计的有益效果可以参考第一方面相关的描述，在此不予赘述。
第四方面，提供了一种数据传输的方法，该方法可以由通信设备执行，或者，也可以由通信设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)执行，对此不作限定，为了便于描述，下面以由第二通信设备执行为例进行说明。
该方法可以包括：第二通信设备向第一通信设备发送N个第一控制信息，N个第一控制信息用于指示M个传输块，N个第一控制信息还用于指示M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码NC后的一个或多个子块，其中，N、M为正整数，且M大于或等于N；第二通信设备向第一通信设备发送M个传输块。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，N个第一控制信息中的一个或多个第一控制信息各自包括第一信息，一个或多个第一控制信息中包括的第一信息用于指示M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块，其中，一个或多个第一信息满足预设条件。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，N个第一控制信息中的每个第一控制信息都包括第一信息，N个第一控制信息中包括的N个第一信息用于指示M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块，其中，该N个第一信息的取值相同。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第二通信设备接收来自第一通信设备的第四信息，第四信息用于通知第二通信设备是否继续发送第一数据块的子块。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，第四信息包括第一数据块的索引和/或指示信息，指示信息用于指示第四信息是否包含其他数据块的信息；或者，第四信息用于指示用于译码第一数据块所需的传输块和/或子块的数量。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，第二通信设备向第一通信设备发送M个传输块之后，方法还包括：第二通信设备接收来自第一通信设备的第五信息，第五信息用于指示数值Q，数值Q为除了K个子块以外译码第一数据块还需要的传输块和/或子块数量，K个子块为M个传输块中信道译码正确的传输块所传输的子块，K为正整数。
第五方面，提供一种数据传输的装置，该装置用于执行上述第一方面至第四方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。具体地，该装置可以包括用于执行第一方面至第四方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法的单元和/或模块，如处理单元和/或通信单元。
在一种实现方式中，该装置为通信设备(如第一通信设备，又如第二通信设备)。当该装置为通信设备时，通信单元可以是收发器，或，输入/输出接口；处理单元可以是至少一个处理器。可选地，收发器可以为收发电路。可选地，输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。
在另一种实现方式中，该装置为用于通信设备(如第一通信设备，又如第二通信设备)的芯片、芯片***或电路。当该装置为用于通信设备的芯片、芯片***或电路时，通信单元可以是该芯片、芯片***或电路上的输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等；处理单元可以是至少一个处理器、处理电路或逻辑电路等。
第六方面，提供一种数据传输的装置，该装置包括：至少一个处理器，用于执行存储器存储的计算机程序或指令，以执行上述第一方面至第四方面任一种可能实现方式中的方 法。可选地，该装置还包括存储器，用于存储的计算机程序或指令。可选地，该装置还包括通信接口，处理器通过通信接口读取存储器存储的计算机程序或指令。
在一种实现方式中，该装置为通信设备(如第一通信设备，又如第二通信设备)。
在另一种实现方式中，该装置为用于通信设备(如第一通信设备，又如第二通信设备)的芯片、芯片***或电路。
第七方面，本申请提供一种处理器，用于执行上述第一方面至第四方面提供的方法。
对于处理器所涉及的发送和获取/接收等操作，如果没有特殊说明，或者，如果未与其在相关描述中的实际作用或者内在逻辑相抵触，则可以理解为处理器输出和接收、输入等操作，也可以理解为由射频电路和天线所进行的发送和接收操作，本申请对此不做限定。
第八方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读介质存储用于设备执行的程序代码，该程序代码包括用于执行上述第一方面至第四方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第九方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第四方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十方面，提供一种通信***，包括前述的第一通信设备和第二通信设备。
附图说明
图1是适用于本申请实施例的无线通信***100的一示意图。
图2是适用于本申请实施例的无线通信***200的一示意图。
图3示出了一种8D2U的时隙配比的示意图。
图4示出了增量冗余方案下的HARQ过程的示意图。
图5示出了DRX机制的一示意图。
图6示出了DRX机制的另一示意图。
图7示出了DRX机制的另一示意图。
图8示出了DRX机制的另一示意图。
图9示出了网络编码方式的示意图。
图10示出了网络编码功能的示意图。
图11示出了网络编码后的数据进行传输的示意图。
图12是本申请实施例提供的一种数据传输的方法1200的示意图。
图13是本申请实施例提供的一种数据传输的方法1300的示意图。
图14是本申请实施例提供的基于RLC层的网络编码反馈的示意图。
图15是本申请实施例提供的第四信息的示意图。
图16是本申请实施例提供的一种数据传输的方法1600的示意图。
图17是本申请实施例提供的一种数据传输的装置的示意性框图。
图18是本申请实施例提供的另一种数据传输的装置的示意性框图。
图19是本申请实施例提供的又一种数据传输的装置的示意性框图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。
本申请提供的技术方案可以应用于各种通信***，例如：第五代(5th generation，5G)或新无线(new radio，NR)***、长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)***、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex，FDD)***、LTE时分双工(time division duplex，TDD)***等。本申请提供的技术方案还可以应用于未来的通信***，如第六代(6th generation，6G)移动通信***。本申请提供的技术方案还可以应用于设备到设备(device to device，D2D)通信，车到万物(vehicle-to-everything，V2X)通信，机器到机器(machine to machine，M2M)通信，机器类型通信(machine type communication，MTC)，以及物联网(internet of things，IoT)通信***或者其他通信***。
本申请实施例中的终端设备也可以称为用户设备(user equipment，UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、通信设备、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。
终端设备可以是一种向用户提供语音/数据的设备，例如，具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。目前，一些终端的举例为：手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device，MID)、可穿戴设备，虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)设备、混合现实(mix reality，MR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)或智能驾驶中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol，SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、可穿戴设备，5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network，PLMN)中的终端设备等，本申请实施例对此并不限定。
作为示例而非限定，在本申请实施例中，该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备，是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称，如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上，或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备，更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能，例如：智能手表或智能眼镜等，以及只专注于某一类应用功能，需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用，如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。
本申请实施例中，用于实现终端设备的功能的装置可以是终端设备，也可以是能够支持终端设备实现该功能的装置，例如芯片***或芯片，该装置可以被安装在终端设备中。本申请实施例中，芯片***可以由芯片构成，也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。
本申请实施例中的网络设备可以是用于与终端设备通信的设备，该网络设备也可以称为接入网设备或无线接入网设备，如网络设备可以是基站。本申请实施例中的网络设备可以是指将终端设备接入到无线网络的无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)节点(或设备)。基站可以广义的覆盖如下中的各种名称，或与如下名称进行替换，比如：节点B (NodeB)、演进型基站(evolved NodeB，eNB)、下一代基站(next generation NodeB，gNB)、中继站、接入点、传输点(transmitting and receiving point，TRP)、发射点(transmitting point，TP)、主站、辅站、多制式无线(motor slide retainer，MSR)节点、家庭基站、网络控制器、接入节点、无线节点、接入点(access point，AP)、传输节点、收发节点、基带单元(baseband unit，BBU)、射频拉远单元(remote radio unit，RRU)、有源天线单元(active antenna unit，AAU)、射频头(remote radio head，RRH)、中心单元(central unit，CU)、分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)、定位节点等。基站可以是宏基站、微基站、中继节点、施主节点或类似物，或其组合。基站还可以指用于设置于前述设备或装置内的通信模块、调制解调器或芯片。基站还可以是移动交换中心以及D2D、V2X、M2M通信中承担基站功能的设备、6G网络中的网络侧设备、未来的通信***中承担基站功能的设备等。基站可以支持相同或不同接入技术的网络。本申请的实施例对网络设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。
基站可以是固定的，也可以是移动的。例如，直升机或无人机可以被配置成充当移动基站，一个或多个小区可以根据该移动基站的位置移动。在其他示例中，直升机或无人机可以被配置成用作与另一基站通信的设备。
在一些部署中，本申请实施例所提及的网络设备可以为包括CU、或DU、或包括CU和DU的设备、或者控制面CU节点(控制面的中央单元(central unit-control plane，CU-CP))和用户面CU节点(用户面的中央单元(central unit-user plane，CU-UP))以及DU节点的设备。
网络设备和终端设备可以部署在陆地上，包括室内或室外、手持或车载；也可以部署在水面上；还可以部署在空中的飞机、气球和卫星上。本申请实施例中对网络设备和终端设备所处的场景不做限定。
首先结合图1和图2简单介绍适用于本申请的网络架构，如下。
图1示出了适用于本申请实施例的无线通信***100的一示意图。如图1所示，该无线通信***100可以包括至少一个网络设备，例如图1所示的网络设备110，该无线通信***100还可以包括至少一个终端设备，例如图1所示的终端设备120。网络设备和终端设备均可配置多个天线，网络设备与终端设备可使用多天线技术通信。
其中，网络设备和终端设备通信时，网络设备可以管理一个或多个小区，一个小区中可以有整数个终端设备。可选地，网络设备110和终端设备120组成一个单小区通信***，不失一般性，将小区记为小区#1。网络设备110可以是小区#1中的网络设备，或者，网络设备110可以为小区#1中的终端设备(例如终端设备120)服务。
需要说明的是，小区可以理解为网络设备的无线信号覆盖范围内的区域。
图2示出了适用于本申请实施例的无线通信***200的一示意图。如2图所示，该无线通信***200包括多个终端设备，例如图2中的终端设备121至终端设备123。终端设备121至终端设备123之间可以直接进行通信。例如，终端设备121和终端设备122可以单独或同时发送数据给终端设备123。
应理解，图1和图2仅为便于理解而示例的简化示意图，该无线通信***100或无线通信***200中还可以包括其他网络设备或者还可以包括其他终端设备，图1或图2中未予以画出。本申请实施例可以适用于发送端设备和接收端设备通信的任何通信场景。
数据或信息可以通过时频资源来承载，在时域上，时频资源可以包括一个或多个时域单位(或者，也可以称为时间单位)。一个时域单位可以是一个符号，或者一个迷你时隙(mini-slot)，或者一个时隙(slot)，或者一个子帧(subframe)，等等。
图3示出了一种8D2U的时隙配比的示意图。该时隙配比的示意图，例如可以用于蜂窝网络中采用时分双工(time division duplex，TDD)的场景。作为示例，图3所示的时隙配比可以为子载波间隔(sub-carrier spacing，SCS)为30kHz下的时隙配比。
在本申请实施例中，用D表示下行时隙，下行时隙用于下行传输；用U表示上行时隙，上行时隙用于上行传输。8D2U的时隙配比，表示以10个时隙为一个周期，该周期内包含8个下行时隙，以及2个上行时隙。
终端设备向网络设备发送反馈信息时，该反馈信息是在上行时隙传输。如图2所示，终端设备的反馈信息可以在以下时隙传输：U00时隙、U01时隙、U10时隙、U11时隙。举例来说，网络设备向终端设备发送数据，若在D05时隙传输的数据传输失败，那么该数据的反馈信息可以通过U00时隙或U01时隙上报给网络设备；若在D11时隙传输的数据传输失败，那么该数据的反馈信息可以通过U10时隙或U11时隙上报给网络设备。
假设空口时延要求为10ms。在D05时隙传输的数据可以有一次重传调度的机会，即网络设备可以在D10-D17时隙调度重传该数据。D11时隙传输的数据没有重传调度的机会，即网络设备调度D11的重传数据已经超过了空口时延要求(如10ms)。
对于某些业务，如XR业务，对传输时延有要求，在某些时隙传输的数据传输失败后，网络设备可能会来不及为这些数据及时调度重传数据，这将影响用户的体验。本申请实施例提供的方案，可以降低时延，满足用户的体验。
可以理解，上述图3为示例性说明，本申请实施例不限于此。例如，对于侧行链路(sidelink)的场景，数据可在物理侧行链路共享信道(physical sidelink share channel，PSSCH)上传输，反馈信息可在物理侧行链路反馈信道(physical sidelink feedback channel，PSFCH)上传输，PSFCH可以与PSSCH共享一个时隙。示例地，PSFCH可以周期性传输。举例来说，若PSFCH的周期为0，则表示无反馈；若周期为P(P为大于1或等于1的整数)，那么可表示每P个时隙会出现一个PSFCH。关于侧行链路场景中数据和反馈信息所占的时域资源的具体方案，可以参考现有技术，其对本申请实施例的保护不造成限定。
为便于理解本申请实施例，对本申请中涉及到的术语做简单说明。
1、混合自动重传请求(hybrid automatic repeat request，HARQ)
在空口传输的过程中，可能会出现传输比特出错或者丢包的情况，通过HARQ机制可以提高空口传输的鲁棒性。HARQ是一种结合前向纠错码(forward error correction，FEC)和自动重传请求(automatic repeat request，ARQ)的重传机制。
FEC：是一种差错控制方式，指信号在被送入传输信道之前，发送端预先按照算法进行编码处理，加入带有信号本身特征的冗码；接收端按照相应算法对接收到的信号进行解码，从而找出在传输过程中产生的错误码并将其纠正的技术。
ARQ：是指接收端通过循环冗余校检(cyclic redundancy check，CRC)校验信息来判断接收到的数据是否正确，并将判断结果反馈给发送端；如果接收错误，发送端收到反馈信息后重新发送数据，直到接收端正确接收。
HARQ机制利用FEC算法对信道进行编码处理，即在发送的信息中添加具有检错和 纠错能力的FEC码，该FEC码可称为冗余信息。接收端按照相应的算法对接收到的信息进行译码，若发现传输过程中产生了错误码，则对该错误码进行纠正。如果可以纠正，则接收端正确接收(即数据传输成功)；如果纠正不了，则利用ARQ机制，请求发送端重传数据；如果重传数据后，还是接收错误，那么再次请求重传，直至接收正确为止。
HARQ机制，利用FEC技术可以做到不必重传数据就能恢复受损数据，但如果单纯采用FEC技术，要达到很高的传输效率，这会大大增加编解码过程的计算开销和复杂度，所以将FEC技术与ARQ技术结合起来互为补充，可以更好的提升传输效率。因此，相比于单纯使用FEC技术，使用HARQ机制，可以降低编解码过程的复杂度和计算开销。
ARQ机制中，接收端如果收到错误数据，会请求重传并丢弃错误信息。虽然这些错误数据包不能够独立地正确译码，但是它们依然包含一些有用的信息，因此，HARQ机制中提出了软合并。软合并是指：接收端将接收到的错误数据包保存在一个HARQ缓存(buffer)中，并与后续接收到的重传数据包进行合并，然后对合并后的数据包进行译码，如果还是译码失败，则再请求重传，再进行数据包合并，从而得到一个比单独译码更可靠的数据包。通过软合并可以获得两种增益：1)重传相同编码比特时获得的信号能量增益，2)重传时发送额外的校验比特获得的编码增益。根据重传的比特信息与初传的比特信息是否相同，软合并还可分为追逐合并(chase combining，CC)和增量冗余(incremental redundancy，IR)，其中，追逐合并中重传的比特信息与初传的比特信息相同，增量冗余中重传的比特信息不需要与初传的比特信息相同。
在追逐合并中，发送端将原始信息比特加上CRC后通过编码产生编码比特集，无论初传还是重传都发送这个编码比特集。每次重传的比特信息都与初传的比特信息相同，可以提升信噪比。
在增量冗余中，每一次重传的比特信息可以与初传的比特信息不同。发送端可以生成多个编码比特集，每个编码比特集都携带相同的信息。每当需要重传时，通常会传输与前一次不同的编码比特集，接收端会把重传的数据与前一次传输的数据进行合并。每次重传的编码比特集可称为一个冗余版本(redundancy version，RV)。在增量冗余中，发送端通过重传来发送额外的冗余信息，随着重传次数的增加，冗余信息不断累积，从而获得更好的译码效果。
作为示例，HARQ过程可以采用停止等待协议(stop-and-wait protocol)来发送数据。停止等待协议，表示发送端发送一个传输块(transport block，TB)后，等待确认信息；接收端可以使用1比特的信息对该传输块进行肯定应答(acknowledgement，ACK)或否定应答(negative acknowledgement，NACK)；接收端在收到ACK后再发送下一个TB。其中，ACK可表示TB被成功接收，且TB被成功解码；NACK可表示TB未被成功接收，或TB未被成功解码。下面结合图4进行示例性说明。
图4示出了增量冗余方案下的HARQ过程的示意图。
如图4所示，其中，发送端向接收端发送{TB0，RV0}，{TB0，RV0}表示传输的传输块为TB0，冗余版本为RV0；接收端解码{TB0，RV0}；接收端根据TB0的接收情况确定TB0的反馈信息是ACK或NACK。举例来说，若接收端成功接收并解码TB0，则向发送端发送ACK，发送端收到来自接收端的ACK后，向接收端发送{TB1，RV0}；若接收端未成功接收或未成功解码TB0，则向发送端发送NACK，发送端收到来自接收端的 NACK后，向接收端发送{TB0，RV1}。
图4是以增量冗余的方案为例进行的说明。需要说明的是，在追逐合并的方案中，没有RV的概念，所以每次重传都是初传的数据。例如，发送端向接收端发送TB0，若接收端接收或解码失败，则向发送端返回NACK，发送端收到该NACK后，再次向接收端发送TB0，该TB0与初传TB0一致。
通常，终端设备按照网络设备指示的时间发送反馈信息。作为示例，网络设备可以通过下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)的HARQ反馈定时字段(如记为k1)来控制发送HARQ反馈信息的时间，其中，k1可标识物理下行共享信道(physical downlink share channel，PDSCH)数据和终端设备发送HARQ反馈信息之间的时隙偏移值。例如，如果终端设备在n时隙收到PDSCH数据，那么终端设备在(n+k1)时隙发送该PDSCH的HARQ反馈信息。作为示例，HARQ反馈信息可承载于物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel，PUCCH)或物理上行共享信道(physical uplink share channel，PUSCH)。
2、HARQ进程号
HARQ进程号也可称为HARQ进程标识(identifier，ID)。一个HARQ进程号可用于唯一地指定一个HARQ进程。终端设备在对TB进行了信道编码之后，可以将信道编码得到的数据保存在HARQ buffer中等待发送。HARQ buffer中的TB与HARQ进程可以具有一一对应关系，每个TB可以对应一个HARQ进程。
下文实施例中，多次提及TB的HARQ进程或数据的HARQ进程，其表示相同的含义，其均用于表示TB对应的HARQ进程。下文实施例中提到的多个TB的HARQ进程,其表示多个TB中每个TB对应的HARQ进程,即多个TB对应的多个HARQ进程。
3、不连续接收(discontinuous reception，DRX)
DRX：可以实现终端设备周期性处于睡眠状态(sleep mode)，且在睡眠状态时不用监听物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)，在处于唤醒(wake up)状态时监听PDCCH，从而可以使终端设备达到省电的目的。
DRX机制在终端设备处于空闲态和连接态下的实现不同，下文描述的DRX均指终端设备处于连接态时使用的DRX，即连接态DRX(connected DRX，C-DRX)。
图5示出了DRX机制的一示意图。
如图5所示，标识“drx-onDurationTimer”的这段时间表示终端设备监听PDCCH的时间，在该段时间，终端设备处于唤醒状态；标识“DRX时机(Opportunity for DRX)”的这段时间表示终端设备不用监听PDCCH的时间，在该段时间，终端设备处于睡眠状态。从图5中可以看到，“Opportunity for DRX”的时间越长，终端设备的功率消耗就越低，但相应的，业务传输的时延也会增加。
终端设备监听PDCCH的时间段可被称为DRX激活期，终端设备不用监听PDCCH的时间段可被称为DRX休眠期或者DRX睡眠期。在DRX激活期内，终端设备持续地监听PDCCH。作为示例，DRX激活期可能使用以下定时器：drx-onDurationTimer、drx-InactivityTimer、drx-RetransmissionTimer。
其中，drx-onDurationTimer和drx-InactivityTimer表示与终端设备监听PDCCH相关的定时器，如图5所示，在drx-onDurationTimer运行期间，终端设备处于唤醒状态。drx-RetransmissionTimer表示与重传相关的定时器。下面结合图6至图8分别说明。
图6示出了DRX机制的另一示意图。
如图6所示，在drx-onDurationTimer和drx-InactivityTimer运行期间，终端设备处于唤醒状态。考虑下面这样的场景：网络设备在drx-onDurationTimer运行期间的最后一个子帧(如记为0号子帧)，有一个较大字节的数据需要发给终端设备，该数据无法在0号子帧上全部发送完。如果按照图5所示的DRX机制，那么终端设备将在1号子帧进入睡眠状态，不去接收来自网络设备的PDSCH数据，网络设备需要等到DRX周期结束，并在drx-onDurationTimer运行时，继续向终端设备发送没有传完的数据。上述处理机制增加了数据的传输时延。为了避免上述情况的出现，并且考虑到一个终端设备在某个子帧被调度并接收数据或发送数据后，很可能在接下来的几个子帧内继续被调度，因此DRX机制中增加了drx-InactivityTimer。drx-InactivityTimer机制原理为：在终端设备进入DRX激活期的On Duration时间内，当终端设备进行上行或下行初次数据传输调度时，网络设备可以启动或重启一个定时器drx-InactivityTimer，终端设备将一直处于唤醒状态，直到该drx-InactivityTimer超时(或者称结束)。举例来说，如果drx-InactivityTimer正在运行，那么即便原本配置的drx-onDurationTimer运行已经超时，由于drx-InactivityTimer还在运行，故终端设备继续监听PDCCH，直到drx-InactivityTimer超时。通过drx-InactivityTimer机制，可以减少数据的传输时延。
图7示出了DRX机制的另一示意图。
如图7所示，如果drx-InactivityTimer正在运行，那么即便drx-onDurationTimer已经超时，终端设备仍然继续监听PDCCH，直到drx-InactivityTimer超时。
图8示出了DRX机制的另一示意图。
在DRX机制中，与重传相关的定时器至少包括：drx-RetransmissionTimer和drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer。示例地，对于下行传输，定时器drx-RetransmissionTimer也可以描述为：drx-RetransmissionTimerDL。作为示例，对于下行传输，定时器drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer也可以描述为：drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerDL。下文，为不失一般性，用drx-RetransmissionTimer和drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer描述。
考虑下面这样的场景：如果某个TB解码失败，终端设备可以假定在drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer之后才可能会重传该TB，因此在drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer运行时，终端设备可以不用监听PDCCH。当drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer超时，且该TB的HARQ进程接收到的数据没有被成功解码时，终端设备为该HARQ进程启动一个drx-RetransmissionTimer。drx-RetransmissionTimer可表示终端设备等待重传的最长时间。当该drx-RetransmissionTimer运行时，终端设备监听用于重传的PDCCH。
3、网络编码(network coding，NC)
在本申请实施例中，网络编码可以认为是一种对待传输数据进行编码的方式。举例来说，发送端可以对待传输的数据包进行网络编码，产生额外的冗余包，接收端接收该数据包和额外的冗余包，通过网络编码的解码恢复出丢掉的数据。在本申请实施例中提及的网络编码，可以是具有纠删功能的任意一种编码，举例来说，接收端通过网络编码的解码(或者称NC译码)能够恢复出丢掉的数据。
图9示出了网络编码方式的示意图。
如图9所示，一个网络编码块(或者称一个数据块)包括A个网络编码包(或者也可 称为网络编码子块，或者子块)，A为正整数。每个网络编码包包含若干比特的数据，每个网络编码包含的比特数相同。作为示例，包含数据块数据的网络编码包可以称为网络编码数据包，或者网络编码***包。对A个网络编码数据包进行网络编码，可产生B个网络编码冗余包，B为正整数。每个网络编码冗余包的大小和网络编码数据包的大小相同，即每个网络编码冗余包所包含的比特数与网络编码数据包包含的比特数相同。其中，B可以是预定义或预配置的固定值，也可以为无穷。B为无穷，可以理解为B的取值没有上限。B为无穷时，可以认为发送端一直发送该网络编码块的数据，直到接收到接收端反馈的确认信息后，停止发送该网络编码块的数据。上述网络编码数据包也可以简称为数据包，网络编码冗余包也可以简称为冗余包。
由于一些原因，如信道质量的变化，接收端可能不能正确接收网络编码的所有数据包。如图9所示，在经历空口传输后，网络编码块中的部分网络编码包未正确接收。然而因为接收端接收到一定数量的网络编码冗余包，因此通过网络编码的解码，可将传输失败的网络编码数据包恢复出来。
以XR业务为例，可将一个XR帧视为一个网络编码块，该XR帧被分成多个网络编码包，在这些网络编码包间进行网络编码，产生冗余包。在经历空口传输后，接收端接收到了上述(A+B)个网络编码包中一定数量(如A个)的网络编码包后，可以通过网络编码的解码，将传输失败的网络编码包恢复，从而使能XR帧的完整传输。举例来说，以raptorQ码为例，当接收端接收到(A+B)中任意A个网络编码包后，对应网络编码块可被恢复的概率约99％；当接收端接收到(A+B)中任意(A+1)个网络编码包后，对应网络编码块可被恢复的概率约99.99％；当接收端接收到(A+B)中任意(A+2)个网络编码包后，对应网络编码块可被恢复的概率约99.9999％。
作为示例，网络编码功能可放置于高层，即物理层之上的某一层中。例如，在现有的高层中增加网络编码功能，如在无线链路层控制协议(radio link control，RLC)层中增加网络编码功能。再例如，新增一协议层(或者称功能层)，该新增的协议层用于实现网络编码功能。
图10示出了网络编码功能的示意图。
如图10中的(a)所示，在RLC层中增加网络编码功能，即网络编码功能可以嵌入至RLC层中，也就是说网络编码功能在RLC层实现，对此不予限制，例如，也可以在分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层或者媒体介入控制(media access control，MAC)层中增加网络编码功能。如图10中的(b)或(c)所示，为网络编码功能添加一个协议层，如记为NC层。例如，如图10中的(b)所示，NC层可位于PDCP层和RLC层之间。再例如，如图10中的(c)所示，NC层可位于RLC层和MAC层之间。
以图10中的(a)所示的结构为例，RLC层的数据不仅执行RLC层的一些操作，还执行如图9所示的网络编码的操作。例如，一个RLC服务数据单元(service data unit，SDU)可作为网络编码块，该一个RLC SDU包括多个网络编码包，即该RLC SDU被分段成多个网络编码包；再例如，每个RLC SDU可作为一个网络编码包，多个RLC SDU构成一个网络编码块。在进行网络编码后，RLC层可将网络编码后的数据通过逻辑信道发送至MAC层，MAC层可将多个不同的RLC数据复用至一个MAC层协议数据单元 (protocol data unit，PDU)中。
通过网络编码，可以避免由于数据丢包而导致的用户体验的下降，还可以避免重传该丢失的数据包而导致的数据传输的时延。然而，可能会发生下面这种场景：在数据传输过程中，发生了数据包丢失的情况，虽然高层基于物理层上报的网络编码包已经可以译码，但由于物理层不知道，故接收端仍会执行与重传相关的操作，进而造成空口资源浪费，带来功耗开销的问题。下面结合图11进行说明。
图11示出了网络编码后的数据进行传输的示意图。
如图11所示，假设在D00时隙至D03时隙传输的是同一网络编码块的网络编码包，在D02时隙传输的网络编码包传输失败，在其他时隙传输的网络编码包传输成功。终端设备在D03时隙接收到网络编码包后开始译码。假设终端设备基于接收到的网络编码包可成功译码网络编码块。然而由于在D02时隙传输的网络编码包在物理层译码出现错误，因此，终端设备在U时隙上报NACK后，开启drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer。在drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer超时后，开启drx-RetransmissionTimer，终端设备在drx-RetransmissionTimer运行期间监听用于重传的控制信息。这样，不仅无助于网络编码块的解码，反而会使得原本处于睡眠状态的终端设备被唤醒，增加终端设备的功耗，而且发送端调度重传数据带来了空口资源的浪费。
本申请提出一种方案，高层基于物理层上报的网络编码包可以译码网络编码块时，通知物理层，从而物理层可以不再执行与该网络编码块相关的操作，例如停止接收和/或停止解码该网络编码块的网络编码包，或停止执行与重传相关的操作，减少空口资源的浪费，降低功耗开销。
上面对本申请中涉及到的术语做了简单说明，下文实施例中不再赘述。此外，上文关于术语的说明，仅是为便于理解做的说明，其对本申请实施例的保护范围不造成限定。
可以理解，本文中术语“和/或”，仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。另外，本文中字符“/”，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
在本申请中，“指示”可以显式地和/或隐式地指示。示例性地，隐式指示可以基于用于传输的位置和/或资源；显式指示可以基于一个或多个参数，和/或一个或多个索引，和/或一个或多个它所表示的位模式。
下文将结合附图详细说明本申请实施例提供的数据传输的方法。本申请提供的实施例可以适用于发送端设备和接收端设备通信的任何通信场景，如可以应用于上述图1或图2所示的网络架构中。
下文实施例中，数据块表示前面所述的网络编码块，子块表示前面所述的网络编码包(即承载于网络编码块中的网络编码包)。一个传输块中可以包括一个或多个子块，一个数据块可以包括一个或多个子块。此外，下文实施例中，“承载于传输块中的子块”与“传输块的数据”，有时交替使用，其用于表示相同的含义。举例来说，低层将传输块的数据上报给高层，也可以替换为，低层将承载于传输块中的子块上报给高层。
图12是本申请实施例提供的一种数据传输的方法1200的示意图。方法1200可以包括如下步骤。
1210，第一通信设备接收来自第二通信设备的M个TB，M个TB用于传输第一数据 块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块。
其中，M为正整数。
1220，第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层发送K个子块，K个子块为M个TB中信道译码正确的TB所传输的子块。
其中，K为正整数。
其中，第一通信设备的高层，可以表示能够实现网络编码功能的协议层。作为示例，第一通信设备的高层可以为以下任一项：RLC层、PDCP层、MAC层或NC层。以图10中的(a)所示的结构为例，第一通信设备的高层可以为RLC层；或者，以图10中的(b)或(c)所示的结构为例，第一通信设备的高层可以为NC层。
其中，第一通信设备的低层，可以表示接收TB的协议层，或者可以表示向高层上报TB数据的协议层。作为示例，第一通信设备的低层为PHY层。
1230，第一通信设备的高层向第一通信设备的低层发送通知信息，该通知信息用于通知在K个子块经过NC译码后第一数据块是否被成功解码。
一种可能的情况，若第一通信设备的高层在接收到K个子块后可成功解码第一数据块，则第一通信设备的高层向第一通信设备的低层发送通知信息，该通知信息用于通知第一数据块被成功解码。
基于本申请实施例，第一通信设备的低层(如物理层)接收来自第二通信设备的M个TB，该M个TB传输同一数据块(如记为第一数据块)经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块；若第一通信设备的低层对M个TB中的M1个TB信道译码正确，则第一通信设备的低层向高层发送M1个TB所传输的所有(K个)子块；若第一通信设备的高层通过K个子块可成功解码第一数据块，则第一通信设备的高层可以向低层发送通知信息，低层根据该通知信息可获知不需要再执行与该第一数据块相关的操作，例如不需要请求M个TB中除M1个TB以外的TB的重传，再例如不需要再接收和/或不需要再解码用于传输该第一数据块的TB，等等。或者，若第一通信设备的高层在接收到K个子块后未成功解码第一数据块，则第一通信设备的高层可以向低层发送通知信息，低层根据该通知信息可获知第一数据块还未成功解码。通过该方式，可以减少空口资源的浪费，降低功耗开销。可选的，若第一通信设备的高层在接收到K个子块后未成功解码第一数据块，第一通信设备的高层也可以不向低层进行通知，低层可以执行正常的重传等操作。
上面结合方法1200，介绍了高层基于低层上报的子块可以译码第一数据块的情况下通知低层的方案。下面结合方法1300从TB角度介绍具体的方案。可以理解，下文方法1300中的方案可以与方法1200中的方案结合使用。
图13是本申请实施例提供的一种数据传输的方法1300的示意图。方法1300可以包括如下步骤。
1310，第一通信设备接收N个第一控制信息，N个第一控制信息用于指示M个TB，N个第一控制信息还用于指示M个TB用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块。即，N个第一控制信息还用于指示M个TB传输的经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块属于同一个数据块。
其中，N、M为正整数，且M大于或等于N。可选地，N为大于2或等于2的整数。
其中，第一控制信息，例如可以为DCI，或者也可以为侧行链路控制信息(sidelink  control information，SCI)，或者也可以为其它控制信息，不予限制。
其中，第一数据块用于表示同一数据块，其命名不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定。例如，第一数据块也可以替换为目标数据块，或者替换为同一数据块。
1320，第一通信设备基于N个第一控制信息接收M个TB。
基于本申请实施例，第一通信设备根据N个第一控制信息获知该N个第一控制信息所指示的M个TB用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块。这样通过对第一数据块采用网络编码方式，可以尽可能地满足业务对时延的要求。此外，通过建立TB与第一数据块之间的联系，可以获知第一数据块对应哪些TB，进而可以实现基于该第一数据块的NC译码的情况，确定该第一数据块对应的多个TB的反馈信息。举例来说，若在经过NC译码后可成功解码第一数据块，那么即使M个TB中部分TB未信道译码正确，第一通信设备也可以不再需要通过重传重新接收未信道译码正确的TB，由此，在第一数据块被成功解码后，第一通信设备可以将该M个TB的所有HARQ进程号设置为ACK，使得无需进行重传。从而减少了不必要的重传，降低了数据传输时延，提高了用户体验。
在下文实施例中，为便于描述，可以用关联关系来表示(或者称表征)M个TB用于传输同一数据块(如记为第一数据块)经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块。举例来说，若多个TB用于传输同一数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块，则可以认为该多个TB具有关联关系；若多个TB用于传输不同数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块，则可以认为该多个TB不具有关联关系。或者，若多个TB具有关联关系，则可以认为该多个TB传输的经过网络编码后的所有子块属于同一数据块；若多个TB不具有关联关系，则可以认为该多个TB传输的经过网络编码后的所有子块不属于同一个数据块(可以包括部分子块属于同一个数据块的情况)，或者可以认为该多个TB用于传输不同逻辑信道和/或无线数据承载所对应的高层的数据。可以理解，下文中提及的“TB具有关联关系”，可以替换为“TB用于传输同一数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块”。即，在具体实现过程中，可以没有关联关系的概念。
可选地，关联关系通过第一控制信息中的一个或多个比特来实现。通过该方式，第一通信设备可以通过第一控制信息判断接收到的TB是否具有关联关系，即第一通信设备可以通过第一控制信息判断接收到的TB是否用于传输同一数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块。
可选地，第一控制信息中包括第一信息，该第一信息为一个或多个比特，该第一信息用于指示TB是否具有关联关系。该第一信息，例如也可以称为关联信息。下面介绍几种可能的实现方式。
作为一种可能的实现方式，N个第一控制信息中的每个第一控制信息都包括第一信息，N个第一控制信息中包括的N个第一信息用于指示M个TB用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块，该N个第一信息可以满足预设条件，例如该N个第一信息的取值相同。其中，预设条件可以通过标准预定义，也可以由网络侧配置。其中，若由网络侧配置，则网络侧可以将配置的预设条件发送给终端设备。
基于该实现方式，每个第一控制信息中包括第一信息，若不同第一控制信息中的第一信息的取值相同，则认为该不同第一控制信息指示的多个TB具有关联关系；若不同第一控制信息中的第一信息的取值不同，则认为该不同第一控制信息指示的多个TB不具有关 联关系。
以第一控制信息为DCI，N＝2，M＝2，2个DCI分别各指示1个TB为例进行示例性说明。为区分，将该2个DCI分别记为DCI0和DCI1，其中，DCI0指示的TB为TB0，DCI1指示的TB为TB1。
例如，第一信息为DCI中的一个2比特字段，该字段的取值范围为：00,01,10,11。若DCI0和DCI1中的第一信息取值相同时，如都是“01”(也可以是其他值)，则可认为TB0和TB1具有关联关系；若DCI0和DCI1的第一信息取值不同，如DCI0的第一信息为“00”，DCI1的第一信息为“10”，则可认为TB0和TB1不具有关联关系。
再例如，第一信息为DCI中的一个1比特字段，该字段的取值范围为：0,1。若DCI0和DCI1中的第一信息取值相同时，如都是“1”，则可认为TB0和TB1具有关联关系；若DCI0和DCI1的第一信息取值不同，如DCI0的第一信息为“0”，DCI1的第一信息为“1”，则可认为TB0和TB1不具有关联关系。
应理解，上述仅是一种示例性说明，不予限制。
作为另一种可能的实现方式，该N个第一控制信息中的一个或多个第一控制信息各自包括第一信息，该一个或多个第一控制信息中包括的一个或多个第一信息满足预设条件时，用于指示M个TB用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块。
一示例，N个第一控制信息中的第一个控制信息包括第一信息，以及N个第一控制信息中的最后一个控制信息包括第一信息，当该第一个控制信息中包括的第一信息与该最后一个控制信息中包括的第一信息满足一定的预设条件时，第一通信设备可以确定该M个TB具有关联关系。下面以第一控制信息为DCI，N＝4，M＝4，即4个DCI分别各指示1个TB为例进行示例性说明。为区分，将该4个DCI分别记为DCI0、DCI1、DCI2、DCI3，其中，DCI0指示的TB为TB0，DCI1指示的TB为TB1，DCI2指示的TB为TB2，DCI3指示的TB为TB3。
例如，若DCI0和DCI3中都包括第一信息，且DCI0和DCI3中包括的第一信息满足一定的预设条件时，则可认为DCI0-DCI3之间的DCI所指示的TB具有关联关系，即TB0-TB3具有关联关系。再例如，第一信息为DCI中的一个1比特字段，该字段的取值范围为：0,1，若DCI0和DCI3中的第一信息取值均为“1”，则可认为DCI0-DCI3之间的DCI所指示的TB具有关联关系，即TB0-TB3具有关联关系。
又一示例，N个第一控制信息中的每个第一个控制信息都包括第一信息，N个第一控制信息中包括的N个第一信息的取值满足预设条件时，第一通信设备确定该M个TB具有关联关系。其中，预设条件，可以表示N个第一信息的取值满足一定的规律，或者也可以表示N个第一信息的取值属于预设范围中的取值。下面以第一控制信息为DCI，N＝2，M＝2，即2个DCI指示2个TB(每个DCI指示1个TB)为例进行示例性说明。为区分，将该2个DCI分别记为DCI0和DCI1，其中，DCI0指示的TB为TB0，DCI1指示的TB为TB1。
例如，第一信息为DCI中的一个2比特字段，该字段的取值范围为：00,01,10,11。若DCI0和DCI1中的第一信息取值属于01,10中的值(如DCI0中的第一信息的取值为“01”，DCI1中的第一信息的取值为“10”)，则可认为TB0和TB1具有关联关系；若DCI0和DCI1中的第一信息取值不都属于01,10中的值(如DCI0中的第一信息的取值为“00”， DCI1中的第一信息的取值为“11”；或者，DCI0中的第一信息的取值为“01”，DCI1中的第一信息的取值为“11”；或者，DCI0中的第一信息的取值为“01”，DCI1中的第一信息的取值为“00”等)，则可认为TB0和TB1不具有关联关系。
作为另一种可能的实现方式，N＝1，该一个第一控制信息包括第一信息，该第一信息取特定值时，M个TB用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块。
基于该实现方式，一个第一控制信息中包括第一信息，该第一控制信息可用于指示多个TB，该第一信息用于指示该多个TB是否具有关联关系。例如，该第一信息为1个比特，若该第一信息的取值为“1”，则认为该第一控制信息指示的多个TB具有关联关系；若该第一信息的取值为“0”，则认为该第一控制信息指示的多个TB不具有关联关系。
作为另一种可能的实现方式，N＝1，该一个第一控制信息中包括第一信息时，M个TB用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块。
基于该实现方式，一个第一控制信息可用于指示多个TB，该第一控制信息中是否包括第一信息可用于指示该多个TB是否具有关联关系。例如，若第一控制信息中包括该第一信息，则认为该第一控制信息指示的多个TB具有关联关系；若第一控制信息中不包括该第一信息，则认为该第一控制信息指示的多个TB不具有关联关系。
可以理解，上述几种可能的实现方式为示例性说明，本申请实施例并不限制于此。例如，当一个第一控制信息用于指示多个TB时，可以默认该多个TB用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块，即该M个TB具有关联关系。
可选地，方法1300还包括：第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层发送K个子块，K个子块为M个TB中信道译码正确的TB所传输的子块。
在步骤1310中第一通信设备基于N个第一控制信息接收M个TB后，第一通信设备的低层对该M个TB进行信道译码；若第一通信设备的M个TB中的M1个TB信道译码正确，则第一通信设备的低层向高层上报该M1个TB所传输的所有(K个)子块(或者称：第一通信设备的低层向高层上报承载于该M1个TB中的K个子块)。其中，M1可以小于M，或者M1也可以等于M。示例地，若TB所对应的CRC校验通过，则可以认为该TB信道译码正确。
第一通信设备的高层收到该K个子块后，可以对该K个子块进行NC译码，并基于NC译码的结果向第一通信设备的低层发送第二信息。
可选地，第一通信设备的高层向第一通信设备的低层发送第二信息，第二信息用于指示在K个子块经过NC译码后是否成功解码第一数据块。其中，该第二信息可以为第一通信设备的高层生成并发送的信令。
该第二信息与步骤1230中的通知信息相同，均用于指示在K个子块经过NC译码后第一数据块是否被成功解码。下文主要以第二信息为例进行说明，下文中的第二信息，均可替换为步骤130中的通知信息。
一种可能的情况，若第一通信设备在接收到K个子块后，经过NC译码可成功解码第一数据块，则第一通信设备的高层向第一通信设备的低层发送第二信息，第二信息用于指示成功解码第一数据块。
另一种可能的情况，若在K个子块经过NC译码后不可成功解码第一数据块，则第一通信设备的高层向第一通信设备的低层发送第二信息，第二信息用于指示未成功解码第一 数据块。
作为示例，K大于或等于预设阈值时，K个子块经过NC译码后第一数据块能够被成功解码。第一通信设备的高层收到的子块的数量满足一定条件时(即K大于或等于预设阈值)，可通过该K个子块成功解码第一数据块。其中，预设阈值可以通过标准预定义，也可以由网络侧配置。其中，若由网络侧配置，则网络侧可以将配置的预设阈值发送给终端设备。
可选地，第二信息包括信息#A和/或M1个TB中至少一个TB的标识。
例如，第二信息中包括信息#A，信息#A用于指示是否成功解码第一数据块。第一通信设备根据该信息#A，获知是否成功解码第一数据块。作为示例，信息#A为1个比特，该信息#A的取值范围为：0,1。若信息#A的取值为“1”，则可认为第二信息用于指示成功解码第一数据块；若信息#A的取值为“0”，则可认为第二信息用于指示未成功解码第一数据块。
再例如，第二信息中包括M1个TB中至少一个TB的标识，第一通信设备根据该M1个TB中至少一个TB的标识，获知成功解码第一数据块。在该方案下，该M1个TB中至少一个TB的标识可用于指示成功解码第一数据块，即若第二信息中包括该M1个TB中至少一个TB的标识，则第一通信设备可确定成功解码第一数据块。可选地，第一通信设备根据该M1个TB中至少一个TB的标识，确定M个TB的标识。关于确定M个TB的标识，后面详细描述。
再例如，第二信息中包括信息#A和M1个TB中至少一个TB的标识。其中，信息#A用于指示成功解码第一数据块。可选地，第一通信设备根据该M1个TB中至少一个TB的标识，确定M个TB的标识。关于确定M个TB的标识，后面详细描述。
其中，TB的标识，用于识别TB。举例来说，TB的标识可以为TB的HARQ进程号或TB的索引(index)。下文主要以TB的标识为TB的HARQ进程号为例进行说明。
以TB的标识为TB的HARQ进程号为例，一种可能的实现方式，第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层发送第三信息，该第三信息用于指示M1个TB中至少一个TB的HARQ进程号。
基于该实现方式，第一通信设备的低层可以向第一通信设备的高层上报HARQ进程号，进而高层可以获知传输第一数据块的HARQ进程号。示例性地，第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层发送K个子块的同时，第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层发送传输该K个子块的M1个TB中至少一个TB的HARQ进程号。第一通信设备的高层在接收到K个子块以及用于传输K个子块的M1个TB中至少一个TB的HARQ进程号后，可将该K个子块所属的第一数据块和该HARQ进程号建立联系。若该第一数据块可译码，则第一通信设备的高层向第一通信设备的低层发送第二信息，且携带上述接收到的该HARQ进程号。下面以第三信息用于指示M1个TB的HARQ进程号为例，介绍2个示例。
示例1，M1个TB在低层译码成功后，低层向高层上报该M1个TB所传输的子块以及M1个TB的HARQ进程号。
举例来说，当第一通信设备接收到M个TB后，会对该M个TB进行信道译码(如低密度奇偶校验码(low density parity check，LDPC))，并通过CRC校验结果判断该M 个TB是否信道译码成功。假设M个TB中的M1个TB在物理层信道译码成功，则第一通信设备的物理层将该M1个TB的数据(如记为K个子块)以及M1个TB的HARQ进程号一起上报至高层。例如，当M1个TB的CRC校检通过后，该M1个TB在MAC层被解复用，即MAC层将M1个TB中的数据以及M1个TB的HARQ进程号传递至对应的逻辑信道和数据无线承载(data radio bearer，DRB)上，进而上报至高层。
示例2，M1个TB在低层译码成功后，若该M1个TB的数据所对应的逻辑信道或DRB采用了网络编码，则低层向高层上报该M1个TB的数据以及M1个TB的HARQ进程号。
基于示例2，若TB用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块，则MAC层将该TB中的数据以及该TB对应的HARQ进程号上报至该第一数据块所在的逻辑信道上；若TB不用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块，则MAC层将该TB中的数据解复用到对应的逻辑信道上，可以不需要发送该TB对应的HARQ进程号。作为示例，若TB中的数据所对应的逻辑信道或DRB采用了网络编码，则认为该TB用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块。
举例来说，当第一通信设备接收到M个TB后，会对该M个TB进行信道译码，并通过CRC校验结果判断该M个TB是否信道译码成功。假设M个TB中的M1个TB在物理层译码成功，且该M1个TB中的数据属于第一数据块的数据(或者说该M1个TB用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码后的子块)，则第一通信设备的物理层将该M1个TB的数据(如记为K个子块)以及M1个TB的HARQ进程号一起上报至高层。例如，M1个TB的CRC校检通过，当M1个TB会在MAC层被解复用时，可以判断M1个TB的数据是否属于第一数据块的数据；若M1个TB的数据属于第一数据块的数据，表示该M1个TB的数据所对应的逻辑信道或DRB采用了网络编码，则可将该M1个TB的数据以及该M1个TB对应的HARQ进程号一起上报至高层。
上面介绍了M1个TB的标识的相关方案，可以理解，上述是以第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层上报该M1个TB的HARQ进程号为例进行了示例性说明，本申请实施例不限于此。在本申请实施例中，第一通信设备的低层可以向第一通信设备的高层上报该M1个TB中至少一个TB的HARQ进程号。例如，第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层上报该M1个TB中某一个TB的HARQ进程号；再例如，第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层上报该M1个TB中部分TB的HARQ进程号；再例如，第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层上报该M1个TB中各个TB的HARQ进程号。
下面介绍第一通信设备确定M个TB的标识的方案。
第一通信设备根据M1个TB中至少一个TB的标识确定M个TB的标识，可以包括第一通信设备根据M1个TB中至少一个TB的标识，确定M个TB中各个TB的标识。下面结合两种可能的情况进行说明。
第一可能的情况，第一通信设备从第二通信设备处接收M个TB中每个TB的标识，如在步骤1310中，N个第一控制信息中包括M个TB中每个TB的标识。
在该第一种可能的情况下，第一通信设备的低层从第一通信设备的高层接收到M1个TB中至少一个TB的标识(为区分记为目标TB的标识)后，可以根据该目标TB的标识确定目标TB，进而确定出与该目标TB具有关联关系的M个TB中各个TB的标识。
以TB的标识为TB的HARQ进程号为例，假设在步骤1310中，第一通信设备接收4个(即N＝4)第一控制信息(如分别记为DCI0,DCI1,DCI2,DCI3)，该4个第一控制信息用于指示4个(即M＝4)TB(如分别记为TB0,TB1,TB2,TB3)，且该4个TB具有关联关系，即TB0,TB1,TB2,TB3用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块，且该4个DCI分别包括各个TB的HARQ进程号，即DCI0包括TB0的HARQ进程号，DCI1包括TB1的HARQ进程号，DCI2包括TB2的HARQ进程号，DCI3包括TB3的HARQ进程号。假设第一通信设备的低层从第一通信设备的高层接收到M1个TB中至少一个TB的标识为TB0的HARQ进程号。第一通信设备的低层从第一通信设备的高层接收到TB0的HARQ进程号后，可以确定TB0的HARQ进程号，并且根据该TB0与TB1,TB2,TB3具有关联关系，确定TB1的HARQ进程号,TB2的HARQ进程号,以及TB3的HARQ进程号。
第二种可能的情况，第一通信设备从第二通信设备处接收M个TB中至少一个TB的标识。
在该第二种可能的情况下，M个TB的标识之间可以具有一定的关系，第一通信设备可以根据M个TB中某个TB的标识，以及M个TB的标识之间的关系，确定其余TB的标识。例如，第一通信设备从第二通信设备处接收M个TB中标识最小的TB的标识(如第一个TB的标识)，M个TB中除第一个TB以外的TB的标识，可以在第一个TB的标识基础上逐渐加1。在该第二种可能的情况下，第一通信设备的低层从第一通信设备的高层接收到M1个TB中至少一个TB的标识(此时为第一个TB的标识)后，可以根据该第一个TB的标识确定第一个TB，进而确定出与该第一个TB具有关联关系的M个TB中各个TB的标识。
以TB的标识为TB的HARQ进程号为例，假设在步骤1310中，第一通信设备接收1个(即N＝1)第一控制信息(如记为DCI0)，该1个第一控制信息用于指示4个(即M＝4)TB(如分别记为TB0,TB1,TB2,TB3)，该4个TB具有关联关系，即TB0,TB1,TB2,TB3用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块。假设该4个TB中相邻TB的HARQ进程号相差x(x例如为1，或者为大于1的整数)，且DCI0包括第一个TB(如TB0)的HARQ进程号。基于上述假设，第一通信设备的低层从高层接收到M1个TB中至少一个TB的标识为TB0的HARQ进程号。基于该第二种可能的情况，第一通信设备的低层从第一通信设备的高层接收到TB0的HARQ进程号后，可以确定TB0的HARQ进程号，并且根据该TB0与TB1,TB2,TB3具有关联关系，以及根据该4个TB中相邻TB的HARQ进程号相差x，确定TB1的HARQ进程号,TB2的HARQ进程号,以及TB3的HARQ进程号。例如，x＝1，TB0的HARQ进程号为HARQ进程号3，那么TB1的HARQ进程号为HARQ进程号4，TB2的HARQ进程号为HARQ进程号5，以及TB3的HARQ进程号为HARQ进程号6。
可以理解，上述两种情况为示例性说明，本申请实施例不限于此。M个TB具有关联关系，只要可以根据该M个TB中的一个TB确定出M个TB中其他TB的标识的方式都适用于本申请实施例。
还可以理解，对于M个TB中各个TB的标识是否相同，本申请实施例不予限制。
此外，可以理解，第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层发送的TB的标识，与 第一通信设备的高层向第一通信设备的低层发送的TB的标识，可以相同，也可以不同，对此不予限制。下面列举几个示例。
一示例，第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层发送M1个TB中某一个TB的标识(为便于描述，记为TB#1的标识)。在该示例下，第一通信设备的高层向第一通信设备的低层发送的TB的标识可以为TB#1的标识。
另一示例，第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层发送M1个TB中多个TB的标识(为便于描述，记为TB#1的标识和TB#2的标识)。在该示例下，第一通信设备的高层向第一通信设备的低层发送的TB的标识可以为TB#1的标识，或者第一通信设备的高层向第一通信设备的低层发送的TB的标识可以为TB#2的标识，或者，第一通信设备的高层向第一通信设备的低层发送的TB的标识可以为TB#1的标识和TB#2的标识。
可选地，第二信息用于指示成功解码第一数据块时，第一通信设备根据第二信息，确定M个TB的HARQ进程的反馈结果为ACK。
在本申请实施例中，第一通信设备的低层收到第二信息，且第二信息用于指示成功解码第一数据块时，在M个TB中至少一个TB未信道译码正确的情况下(即M1小于M的情况下)，第一通信设备根据第二信息确定该M个TB的标识(如HARQ进程号)，进而确定M个TB的HARQ进程的反馈结果均为ACK。下面介绍两种实现方式。
实现方式1，第二信息包括M1个TB中至少一个TB的标识，第一通信设备根据该M1个TB中至少一个TB的标识，确定该M个TB的HARQ进程的反馈结果均为ACK。
基于该实现方式，第一通信设备根据第二信息中包括的M1个TB中至少一个TB的标识，确定M个TB的标识，进而可以确定该M个TB的HARQ进程(即M个TB对应的M个HARQ进程)的反馈结果均为ACK。
下文主要以TB的标识为TB的HARQ进程号为例进行说明。
举例来说，可以预定义(如协议预定义)，若高层向低层指示HARQ进程号，则默认该HARQ进程的反馈结果为ACK，因此若该第二信息中包括M1个TB的HARQ进程号中的至少一个，则根据预定义(如协议预定义)，低层确定该至少一个HARQ进程的反馈结果为ACK。第一通信设备的低层收到第二信息后，根据该至少一个HARQ进程的反馈结果为ACK，以及M个TB具有关联关系，因此确定M个TB的HARQ进程的反馈结果为ACK。
假设在步骤1310中，第一通信设备接收4个(即N＝4)第一控制信息(如分别记为DCI0,DCI1,DCI2,DCI3)，该4个第一控制信息用于指示4个(即M＝4)TB(如分别记为TB0,TB1,TB2,TB3)，该4个TB具有关联关系，即TB0,TB1,TB2,TB3用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块。假设第一通信设备的低层正确解码DCI0,DCI2和DCI3所指示的TB0,TB2和TB3，DCI1所指示的TB1在低层译码失败；第一通信设备的低层将TB0,TB2,TB3的数据上报给第一通信设备的高层，当第一通信设备的高层基于该TB0,TB2,TB3的数据可成功解码该第一数据块时，则向第一通信设备的低层发送第二信息。
例如，第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层上报TB0,TB2,TB3的数据时，同时上报TB0,TB2,TB3的HARQ进程号，且第一通信设备的高层向第一通信设备的低层发送第二信息时，该第二信息包括TB0的HARQ进程号。第一通信设备的低层收到第二信 息后，根据关联关系，获知TB0与TB1、TB2、以及TB3具有关联关系，因此可以确定TB0,TB1,TB2,TB3的HARQ进程的反馈结果均为ACK。
再例如，第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层上报TB0,TB2,TB3的数据时，同时上报TB0,TB2,TB3的HARQ进程号，且第一通信设备的高层向第一通信设备的低层发送第二信息时，该第二信息包括TB0,TB2,TB3的HARQ进程号，第一通信设备的低层收到第二信息后，根据关联关系，获知TB0,TB2,TB3与TB1具有关联关系，因此可以确定TB0,TB1,TB2,TB3的HARQ进程的反馈结果均为ACK。
再例如，第一通信设备的低层向第一通信设备的高层上报TB0,TB2,TB3的数据时，同时上报TB0的HARQ进程号，且第一通信设备的高层向第一通信设备的低层发送第二信息时，该第二信息包括TB0的HARQ进程号，第一通信设备的低层收到第二信息后，根据关联关系，获知TB0与TB2,TB3，TB1具有关联关系，因此可以确定TB0,TB1,TB2,TB3的HARQ进程的反馈结果均为ACK。
实现方式2，第一通信设备根据预设标识和第一数据块所对应的逻辑信道和/或DRB，确定M个TB的HARQ进程的反馈结果为ACK。
基于该实现方式，第一通信设备根据预设标识和第一数据块所对应的逻辑信道和/或DRB，确定M个TB的标识，进而可以确定该M个TB的HARQ进程的反馈结果为ACK。
其中，预设标识包括M个TB的标识。换句话说，M个TB的标识是从预设标识中选择的。举例来说，N个第一控制信息还用于指示M个TB的标识，该M个TB的标识属于该预设标识。
其中，预设标识，用于表示第一数据块所对应的逻辑信道和/或DRB绑定的(或者称可用的)TB标识。下面以预设标识表示第一数据块所对应的逻辑信道绑定的TB标识，以及TB的标识为TB的HARQ进程号为例进行说明。
逻辑信道绑定的HARQ进程号，表示该逻辑信道可用的HARQ进程号，也就是说，该逻辑信道的数据在该逻辑信道绑定的HARQ进程上进行传输。在本申请实施例中，可以通过逻辑信道绑定HARQ进程号的方式，来建立HARQ进程号和第一数据块之间的关系，使得第一数据块所在的逻辑信道的数据在该逻辑信道绑定的HARQ进程上进行传输。
假设在步骤1310中，第一通信设备接收4个(即N＝4)第一控制信息(如分别记为DCI0,DCI1,DCI2,DCI3)，该4个第一控制信息用于指示4个(即M＝4)TB(如分别记为TB0,TB1,TB2,TB3)，该4个TB具有关联关系。假设第一通信设备的低层正确解码DCI0,DCI2,DCI3所指示的TB0,TB2,TB3，DCI1所指示的TB1在低层译码失败，低层将TB0,TB2,TB3的数据上报给高层，高层基于该TB0,TB2,TB3的数据可成功解码该第一数据块，并向低层发送第二信息。
例如，第一通信设备的高层向第一通信设备的低层发送第二信息，该第二信息包括信息#A。第一通信设备的低层收到第二信息后，根据信息#A获知在K个子块经过NC译码后成功解码第一数据块；第一通信设备根据该第一数据块所对应的逻辑信道以及预设HARQ进程号，将预设HARQ进程号的HARQ反馈全部设置为ACK，该预设HARQ进程号包括TB0,TB1,TB2,TB3的HARQ进程号。
可选地，第一通信设备获取预设标识的信息，该预设标识的信息包括：起始标识、结束标识、标识的数量。一种可能的实现方式，第一通信设备接收该第一数据块所对应的逻 辑信道的配置信息，该配置信息中可以包括预设的HARQ进程号的以下一项或多项信息：起始HARQ进程号、结束HARQ进程号、HARQ进程的数量。
示例地，在无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)中的LogicalChannelConfig information element配置信息中加入allowedSPS-List参数，具体可以为：
nrofHARQ-Processes  INTEGER(1..16)  OPTIONAL,
harq-ProcID-Offset-r19  INTEGER(0..15)  OPTIONAL,
其中，nrofHARQ-Processes，用于表示该逻辑信道可用的HARQ进程的数量，harq-ProcID-harq-ProcID-Offset-r19，用于表示该逻辑信道可用的起始HARQ进程号。
举例来说，当nrofHARQ-Processes为4，harq-ProcID-Offset-r19为5，则可认为该逻辑信道可用的HARQ进程为：以HARQ进程号5为起始的连续4个HARQ进程，即HARQ进程号5、HARQ进程号6、HARQ进程号7、HARQ进程号8。假设HARQ进程最多有16个(即进程号为0-15)，若nrofHARQ-Processes为4，harq-ProcID-Offset-r19为14，则可认为该逻辑信道可用的HARQ进程为：HARQ进程号14、HARQ进程号15、HARQ进程号0、HARQ进程号1，或者也可认为该逻辑信道可用的HARQ进程为：HARQ进程号14、HARQ进程号15、HARQ进程号12、HARQ进程号13。
可以理解，上述为示例性说明，本申请实施例不限于此。
可选地，在成功解码第一数据块时，方法1300还包括：第一通信设备停止接收和/或停止解码用于传输该第一数据块的TB，第一通信设备停止接收或停止监测第二控制信息。
其中，在成功解码第一数据块时，可以替换为M个TB对应的所有HARQ进程的应答信息为ACK，或者也可以替换为第二信息用于指示在K个子块经过NC译码后成功解码第一数据块，或者也可以替换为第二信息用于指示第一数据块可被成功解码。
在本申请实施例中，第一通信设备的低层收到第二信息后，由于该第一数据块可以成功解码，故可以停止与传输该第一数据块相关的操作，也可以停止与重传该M个TB相关的操作。下面结合两种情形分别进行示例性说明。
第一种可能的情形，第一通信设备停止接收和/或停止解码用于传输该第一数据块的TB。
举例来说，第一通信设备接收来自第二通信设备的X个第三控制信息，该X个第三控制信息用于指示L个TB，L为正整数，该L个TB与M个TB具有关联关系。在成功解码第一数据块时，如果第一通信设备还未接收该L个TB，那么第一通信设备停止接收该L个TB；如果第一通信设备已接收该L个TB，那么第一通信设备停止解码该L个TB中的数据。
可选地，第一通信设备停止(stop)该L个TB的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
其中，停止，也可替换为关闭(close)，或者也可替换为切断(switch off)，或者不开启。
一种可能的实现方式，第一通信设备接收第一配置信息，该第一配置信息用于配置L个TB的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。其中，该L个TB的HARQ进程所对应的定时器可以用于指示以下一项或多项：物理控制信道为MAC实体指示一个新传后的持续时间，DRX开始的持续时间(the duration at the beginning of a DRX cycle)。示例地，第一通信设备在上述持续时间内监测控制信息(例如，第一通信设备在上述持续时间内监测第三控 制信息)，若第一通信设备在持续时间内监测到控制信息，则第一通信设备开启该L个TB的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。在本申请实施例中，考虑到第一数据块可以成功解码，故即使第一通知设备监测到该控制信息，也可以不开启该L个TB的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，或者在该L个TB的HARQ进程所对应的定时器已处于开启状态时可以关闭该定时器。
作为示例，L个TB的HARQ进程所对应的定时器包括以下一项或多项定时器：drx-InacvitityTimer，drx-onDurationTimer。其中，drx-InacvitityTimer用于指示(或者称用于实现，或者称用于控制)物理控制信道为MAC实体指示一个新传后的持续时间。drx-onDurationTimer用于指示(或者称用于实现，或者称用于控制)DRX开始的持续时间。关于各定时器，可以参考前面图5至图8中的说明，此处不再赘述。
第二种可能的情形，第一通信设备停止接收或停止监测第二控制信息。
其中，第二控制信息用于指示M个TB中的至少一个TB的重传。举例来说，M1小于M，对于M个TB中除M1个TB以外的(M-M1)个TB，由于第一通信设备对该(M-M1)个TB信道译码错误，因此现有技术中第一通信设备会接收或监测(或者称监听)该(M-M1)个TB的重传控制信息(即第二控制信息)。基于本申请实施例，由于在K个子块经过NC译码后成功解码第一数据块，因此第一通信设备可以停止接收或停止监测该第二控制信息；换句话说，由于第一数据块能够被成功解码，因此第一通信设备可以确定M个TB对应的所有HARQ进程的应答信息为ACK，因此第一通信设备可以停止接收或停止监测该第二控制信息，不再需要该(M-M1)个TB进行重传。
示例地，如果第二控制信息与第一控制信息的HARQ进程号相同，且新数据指示(new data indicator，NDI)相同，那么认为第二控制信息所指示的TB为第一控制信息所指示TB的重传，其中第二控制信息晚于第一控制信息。
可选地，第一通信设备停止M个TB的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
一种可能的实现方式，第一通信设备接收第二配置信息，该第二配置信息用于配置M个TB的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。其中，该M个TB的HARQ进程所对应的定时器可用于指示以下一项或多项：等待重传的最大持续时间(the maximum duration until a DL retransmission is received)，MAC实体期望接收HARQ重传分配的最小持续时间。示例地，第一通信设备在上述最大持续时间内监测指示M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的重传的控制信息(例如，第一通信设备在上述持续时间内监测第二控制信息)。在本申请实施例中，考虑到第一数据块可以成功解码，故即使第一通知设备监测到该控制信息，也可以不开启该M个TB的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，或者在该M个TB的HARQ进程所对应的定时器已处于开启状态时可以关闭该定时器。
作为示例，M个TB的HARQ进程所对应的定时器包括以下一项或多项定时器：drx-RetransmissionTimer，drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer。举例来说，若第一通信设备的低层收到来自高层的第二信息，则第一通信设备关闭或停止或不开启drx-RetransmissionTimer。其中，drx-RetransmissionTimer用于指示(或者称用于实现，或者称用于控制)等待重传的最大持续时间。drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer用于指示(或者称用于实现，或者称用于控制)MAC实体期望接收HARQ重传分配的最小持续时间。关于各定时器，可以参考前面图5至图8中的说明，此处不再赘述。
上文主要介绍了两种可能的情形，对此不予限制。例如，在K个子块经过NC译码后成功解码第一数据块时，如第一通信设备的低层收到第二信息，且第二信息用于指示成功解码第一数据块时，第一通信设备可开启一定时器，如记为PDSCHskipping计时器。其中，PDSCHskipping仅是一种可能的命名，其命名不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定。举例来说，第二信息还可用于指示在接收到第二信息后不需要接收和/或不需要解码第三控制信息所指示的TB的信息。作为示例，第二信息中包括PDSCHskipping字段，该PDSCHskipping字段用于指示在接收到第二信息后不需要接收和/或不需要解码第三控制信息所指示的TB的信息。
例如，为了指示在接收到第二信息后，有多少个第三控制信息所指示的TB不需要接收和/或不需要解码，可在第二信息中加入PDSCHskipping字段，该PDSCHskipping字段可以以第三控制信息的个数为单位(例如0,1,2)。再例如，为了指示在接收到第二信息后，不需要接收和/或不需要解码第三控制信息所指示的TB的时间，可在第二信息中加入PDSCHskipping字段，该PDSCHskipping字段可以以时间为单位(例如，10ms,20ms)，或者也可以以时隙为单位。示例性地，在RRC中的DRX-config中加入PDSCHskipping参数，可如下所示。
Figure PCTCN2022131811-appb-000001
其中，ms i代表i ms,i＝0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8。若配置drx-PDSCHskipping，则在收到第二信息后或者在收到第二信息后的下一个相邻时隙的起始时刻，触发drx-PDSCHskipping定时器。
为便于理解，下面以4个第一控制信息(如分别记为DCI0,DCI1,DCI2,DCI3)为例，介绍上述几种情形。
假设，在步骤1310中，第一通信设备接收4个(即N＝4)第一控制信息(如分别记为DCI0,DCI1,DCI2,DCI3)，该4个第一控制信息用于指示4个(即M＝4)TB(如分别记为TB0,TB1,TB2,TB3)，第一通信设备的低层正确译码DCI0,DCI2,DCI3所指示的TB0,TB2,TB3，第一通信设备的低层向高层上报承载于TB0,TB2,TB3中的子块，高层基于承载于TB0,TB2,TB3中的子块可成功解码该第一数据块，即第二信息用于指示承载于TB0,TB2,TB3中的子块经过NC译码后成功解码第一数据块。基于上述假设，下面结合几种场景进行说明，并且给出两个具体示例下的描述方式。
首先，结合几种可能的场景进行示例性说明。
场景1，第一通信设备的低层在盲检DCI4前或盲检DCI4的过程中，接收到来自高层的第二信息。其中，DCI4(即前述的第三控制信息)用于指示L个TB，该L个TB与M个TB具有关联关系。
在该场景下，第一通信设备的低层在确认DCI4所指示的L个TB与DCI0-3所指示的TB具有关联关系后，不再接收和/或不再解码DCI4所指示的L个TB，将该DCI4所指示的TB的HARQ进程反馈设为ACK，不为该DCI4(或者该DCI4所指示的TB的HARQ 进程)触发drx-InactivityTimer。
场景2，第一通信设备的低层在译码DCI4所指示的TB过程中，接收到来自高层的第二信息。
在该场景下，第一通信设备的低层在确认DCI4所指示的TB与DCI0-3所指示的TB具有关联关系后，可以执行以下一项或多项操作：中断该DCI4所指示的TB的译码过程，清除与该DCI4所指示的TB相关的HARQ buffer，将该DCI4所指示的TB的HARQ进程反馈设为ACK，不为该DCI4(或者该DCI4所指示的TB的HARQ进程)触发drx-InactivityTimer。
场景3，第一通信设备的低层在对DCI4所指示的TB进行译码之后，接收到来自高层的第二信息。
在该场景下，第一通信设备的低层在确认DCI4所指示的TB与DCI0-3所指示的TB具有关联关系后，也不为该DCI4(或者该DCI4所指示的TB的HARQ进程)触发drx-InactivityTimer。
场景4，第一通信设备的低层在该DCI4对应的drx-InactivityTimer运行期间接收到来自高层的第二信息。
例如，DCI4已触发drx-InactivityTimer，在该场景下，第一通信设备在确认DCI4所指示的TB与DCI0-3所指示的TB具有关联关系后，停止drx-InacvitityTimer，将该DCI4所指示的TB的HARQ进程反馈设为ACK。
场景5，第一通信设备的低层在drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer运行期间接收到来自高层的第二信息。
例如，DCI1已触发drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer，在该场景下，第一通信设备在确认TB0,TB1,TB2,TB3具有关联关系后，可以执行以下一项或多项：(1)将TB1的HARQ进程反馈设为ACK，(2)停止drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer，(3)若DCI1所指示的TB译码失败，不为DCI1(或者TB1的HARQ进程)触发drx-RetransmissionTimer。
场景6，第一通信设备的低层在drx-PDSCHskipping定时器运行期间收到DCI4。
第一通信设备的低层收到第二信息后，开启drx-PDSCHskipping定时器，在drx-PDSCHskipping定时器运行期间收到DCI4，第一通信设备的低层在确认DCI4所指示的TB与DCI0-3所指示的TB具有关联关系后，可以执行以下一项或多项：(1)将DCI4所指示的TB的HARQ进程反馈设为ACK，(2)不译码该DCI4所指示的TB，(3)不为该DCI4触发drx-InactivityTimer。
场景7，第一通信设备的低层在drx-onDurationTimer和/或drx-InactivityTimer运行期间接收到来自高层的第二信息。
在该场景下，若第一通信设备收到DCI4，且第一通信设备在确认DCI4所指示的TB与DCI0-3所指示的TB具有关联关系后，针对DCI4对应的PDCCH不触发drx-InacvitityTimer，将该DCI4所指示的TB的HARQ进程反馈设为ACK。
上面结合了几种场景进行了示例性说明，本申请实施例不限于此上述几种场景。可以理解，不管是哪种场景中，对于TB0,TB1,TB2,TB3的HARQ进程，以及与TB0,TB1,TB2,TB3具有关联关系的TB的HARQ进程，反馈均为ACK。
下面仍以场景1上面的那段假设为例，给出两个具体示例下的描述方式。
示例1
假设第一通信设备的低层接收到第二信息，第二信息用于指示承载于TB0,TB2,TB3中的子块经过NC译码后成功解码第一数据块。为便于描述，下文第二信息所指示的TB，表示与第二信息相关的TB，或者说表示用于传输该第一数据块的TB。
例如，第二信息用于指示承载于TB0,TB2,TB3中的子块经过NC译码后成功解码第一数据块，第二信息所指示的TB包括：TB0,TB1,TB2,TB3。
再例如，第二信息用于指示承载于TB0,TB2,TB3中的子块经过NC译码后成功解码第一数据块，且第二信息中包括至少一个TB的标识，第二信息所指示的TB包括该至少一个TB的标识所对应的TB，以及与该至少一个TB的标识所对应的TB具有关联关系的TB。其中，该至少一个TB的标识可以包括以下一项或多项：TB0的标识,TB2的标识,TB3的标识。
一种可能的描述如下：
1a.当第一通信设备的低层接收到第二信息后，执行2a,2b,2c,2d,2e。其中，本申请实施例并不限定2a、2b、2c、2d和2e等各个步骤之间的先后顺序。
2a.开启drx-PDSCHskipping定时器(或者从相邻的下一个时隙的起始时刻开启drx-PDSCHskipping定时器)。若第一通信设备的低层接收到PDCCH的时间晚于该第二信息到达时间但是不晚于drx-PDSCHskipping定时器超时所对应的时刻，且该PDCCH所调度(或者称所指示)的TB与第二信息所指示的TB具有关联关系，则，该PDCCH不会触发drx-InactivityTimer，或者不译码该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH，或者将该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH的HARQ进程反馈均设置为ACK。或者，若第一通信设备的低层接收到PDCCH的时间晚于该第二信息到达时间但是不晚于drx-PDSCHskipping定时器超时所对应的时刻，且该PDCCH所调度(或者称所指示)的TB与第二信息所指示的TB具有关联关系，则，该PDCCH不会触发drx-InactivityTimer，且不译码该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH，且将该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH的HARQ进程反馈均设置为ACK。
2b.将第二信息所指示的TB的HARQ进程反馈均设置为ACK。
2c.若第二信息所指示的TB中至少一个TB的HARQ进程的drx-RetransmissionTimer已开启，则停止该至少一个TB的HARQ进程的drx-RetransmissionTimer。
2d.若正在译码PDSCH，且该PDSCH所对应的TB与第二信息所指示的TB具有关联关系，则执行3a,3b,3c中的一项或多项。
3a.停止译码该PDSCH；
3b.停止该PDSCH所对应的PDCCH触发的drx-InactivityTimer；
3c.将该PDSCH所对应的HARQ进程反馈设置为ACK。
2e.若第一通信设备的低层接收到PDCCH的时间晚于该第二信息到达时间但是不晚于drx-InactivityTimer或drx-onDurationTimer超时所对应的时刻，且该PDCCH所调度(或者称所指示)的TB与第二信息所指示的TB具有关联关系，则，该PDCCH不会触发drx-InactivityTimer，或者不译码该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH，或者将该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH的HARQ进程反馈均设置为ACK。或者，若第一通信设备 的低层接收到PDCCH的时间晚于该第二信息到达时间但是不晚于drx-InactivityTimer或drx-onDurationTimer超时所对应的时刻，且该PDCCH所调度(或者称所指示)的TB与第二信息所指示的TB具有关联关系，则，该PDCCH不会触发drx-InactivityTimer，且不译码该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH，且将该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH的HARQ进程反馈均设置为ACK。
示例2
假设第一通信设备的低层接收到第二信息，第二信息用于指示承载于TB0,TB2,TB3中的子块经过NC译码后成功解码第一数据块，且第一通信设备从第二通信设备接收到第二信息所指示的TB的HARQ进程号。其中，第二信息所指示的TB，表示与第二信息相关的TB，或者说表示用于传输该第一数据块的TB。
例如，第二信息用于指示承载于TB0,TB2,TB3中的子块经过NC译码后成功解码第一数据块，第二信息所指示的TB包括：TB0,TB1,TB2,TB3，第二信息所指示的TB的HARQ进程号包括：TB0的HARQ进程号,TB1的HARQ进程号,TB2的HARQ进程号,TB3的HARQ进程号。
再例如，第二信息用于指示承载于TB0,TB2,TB3中的子块经过NC译码后成功解码第一数据块，且第二信息中包括至少一个TB的标识，第二信息所指示的TB包括该至少一个TB的标识所对应的TB，以及与该至少一个TB的标识所对应的TB具有关联关系的TB，第二信息所指示的TB的HARQ进程号包括：该至少一个TB的标识所对应的TB的HARQ进程号,以及与该至少一个TB的标识所对应的TB具有关联关系的TB的HARQ进程号。其中，该至少一个TB的标识可以包括以下一项或多项：TB0的标识,TB2的标识,TB3的标识。
一种可能的描述如下：
1a.当第一通信设备的低层接收到第二信息后，执行2a,2b,2c,2d,2e,2f。其中，本申请实施例并不限定2a、2b、2c、2d、2e和2f等各个步骤之间的先后顺序。
2a.若第二信息所指示的TB中至少一个TB的HARQ进程的drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer已开启，则停止该至少一个TB的HARQ进程的drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer，并不再开启drx-RetransmissionTimer。
2b.若第二信息所指示的TB中至少一个TB的HARQ进程的drx-InactivityTimer已开启，则停止该至少一个TB的HARQ进程的drx-InactivityTimer。
2c.将第二信息所指示的TB的HARQ进程反馈均设置为ACK。
2d.若第二信息所指示的TB中至少一个TB的HARQ进程的drx-RetransmissionTimer已开启，则停止该至少一个TB的HARQ进程的drx-RetransmissionTimer。
2e.若正在译码PDSCH，且该PDSCH所对应的TB与第二信息所指示的TB具有关联关系，则执行3a,3b,3c中的一项或多项。
3a.停止译码该PDSCH；
3b.停止该PDSCH所对应的PDCCH触发的drx-InactivityTimer；
3c.将该PDSCH所对应的HARQ进程反馈设置为ACK。
2f.若第一通信设备的低层接收到PDCCH的时间晚于该第二信息到达时间但是不 晚于drx-InactivityTimer或drx-onDurationTimer超时所对应的时刻，且该PDCCH所调度(或者称所指示)的TB与第二信息所指示的TB具有关联关系，则，该PDCCH不会触发drx-InactivityTimer，或者不译码该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH，或者将该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH的HARQ进程反馈均设置为ACK。或者，若第一通信设备的低层接收到PDCCH的时间晚于该第二信息到达时间但是不晚于drx-InactivityTimer或drx-onDurationTimer超时所对应的时刻，且该PDCCH所调度(或者称所指示)的TB与第二信息所指示的TB具有关联关系，则，该PDCCH不会触发drx-InactivityTimer，且不译码该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH，且将该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH的HARQ进程反馈均设置为ACK。
另一种可能的描述如下：
1.第一通信设备的低层接收到第二信息后，执行2a,2b,2c,2d,2e,2f,2g。其中，本申请实施例并不限定2a、2b、2c、2d、2e、2f和2g等各个步骤之间的先后顺序。
2a.开启drx-PDSCHskipping定时器(或者从相邻的下一个时隙的起始时刻开启drx-PDSCHskipping定时器)。若第一通信设备的低层接收到PDCCH的时间晚于该第二信息到达时间但是不晚于drx-PDSCHskipping定时器超时所对应的时刻，且该PDCCH所调度(或者称所指示)的TB与第二信息所指示的TB具有关联关系，则，该PDCCH不会触发drx-InactivityTimer，或者不译码该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH，或者将该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH的HARQ进程反馈均设置为ACK。或者，若第一通信设备的低层接收到PDCCH的时间晚于该第二信息到达时间但是不晚于drx-PDSCHskipping定时器超时所对应的时刻，且该PDCCH所调度(或者称所指示)的TB与第二信息所指示的TB具有关联关系，则，该PDCCH不会触发drx-InactivityTimer，且不译码该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH，且将该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH的HARQ进程反馈均设置为ACK。
2b.将第二信息所指示的TB的HARQ进程反馈均设置为ACK。
2c.若第二信息所指示的TB中至少一个TB的HARQ进程的drx-RetransmissionTimer已开启，则停止该至少一个TB的HARQ进程的drx-RetransmissionTimer。
2d.若第二信息所指示的TB中至少一个TB的HARQ进程的drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer已开启，则停止该至少一个TB的HARQ进程的drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer，并不再开启drx-RetransmissionTimer。
2e.若第二信息所指示的TB中至少一个TB的HARQ进程的drx-InactivityTimer已开启，则停止该至少一个TB的HARQ进程的drx-InactivityTimer。
2f.若正在译码PDSCH，且该PDSCH所对应的TB与第二信息所指示的TB具有关联关系，则执行3a,3b,3c中的一项或多项。
3a.停止译码该PDSCH；
3b.停止该PDSCH所对应的PDCCH触发的drx-InactivityTimer；
3c.将该PDSCH所对应的HARQ进程反馈设置为ACK。
2g.若第一通信设备的低层接收到PDCCH的时间晚于该第二信息到达时间但是不晚于drx-InactivityTimer或drx-onDurationTimer超时所对应的时刻，且该PDCCH所 调度(或者称所指示)的TB与第二信息所指示的TB具有关联关系，则，该PDCCH不会触发drx-InactivityTimer，或者不译码该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH，或者该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH的HARQ进程反馈均为ACK。或者，若第一通信设备的低层接收到PDCCH的时间晚于该第二信息到达时间但是不晚于drx-InactivityTimer或drx-onDurationTimer超时所对应的时刻，且该PDCCH所调度(或者称所指示)的TB与第二信息所指示的TB具有关联关系，则，该PDCCH不会触发drx-InactivityTimer，且不译码该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH，且该PDCCH所指示的PDSCH的HARQ进程反馈均为ACK。
上述主要介绍了成功解码第一数据块的情况，可以理解，在未成功解码第一数据块时，可选地，方法1300还包括：第一通信设备开启M个TB中重传的TB的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
作为示例，开启M个TB中重传的TB的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，包括：在drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer超时后的下一个相邻时间单元，开启M个TB中重传的TB的HARQ进程所对应的定时器drx-RetransmissionTimer。换句话说，第一通信设备在第一时间单元开启M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器drx-RetransmissionTimer，其中，第一时间单元晚于第二时间单元，且第一时间单元与第二时间单元相邻，第二时间单元表示drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer超时所在的时间单元。其中，一个时间单元(也可称为时域单元)可以是一个符号或者几个符号，或者一个或多个迷你时隙(mini-slot)，或者一个或多个时隙(slot)，或者一个或多个子帧(subframe)，或者一个或多个毫秒等等。列举的上述时间单元大小仅仅是为了方便理解本申请的方案，不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定。以时间单元为符号为例，在本申请实施例中，例如，在drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer超时后的下一个相邻时间单元(如下一个相邻时间单元的起始时刻，或者结束时刻，或者中间任意时刻)开启M个TB中重传的TB的HARQ进程的drx-RetransmissionTimer。
一种可能的描述方式：
若drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer超时，且若对应HARQ进程号的数据未正确信道译码，且若未接收到第二信息，则在drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer超时后的下一个相邻时间单元开启对应HARQ进程的drx-RetransmissionTimer。
可选地，方法1300还包括：第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第四信息，第四信息用于通知第二通信设备是否继续发送该第一数据块的数据。
一种可能的情况，在成功解码第一数据块时，方法1300还包括：第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第四信息，第四信息用于通知第二通信设备停止发送该第一数据块的数据。另一种可能的情况，在未成功解码第一数据块时，方法1300还包括：第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第四信息，第四信息用于通知第二通信设备继续发送该第一数据块的数据。
其中，在成功解码第一数据块时，可以替换为M个TB对应的所有HARQ进程的应答信息为ACK，或者也可以替换为第二信息用于指示在K个子块经过NC译码后成功解码第一数据块，或者也可以替换为第二信息用于指示第一数据块可被成功解码。
基于本申请实施例，在成功解码第一数据块的情况下，如果第二通信设备继续发送该第一数据块的数据，不仅无助于第一通信设备的解码，还会占用空口资源，导致空口资源 的浪费。因此，成功解码第一数据块的情况下(如第一通信设备的低层收到第二信息，且第二信息用于指示成功解码第一数据块)，第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第四信息，用于通知停止发送该第一数据块的数据，节省空口资源。
图14是本申请实施例提供的基于RLC层的网络编码反馈的示意图。
在本申请实施例中，可以基于RLC确认模式(acknowledged mode，AM)反馈第一数据块的解码情况，如图14所示，该图14可用于发送端(如第二通信设备)的RLC和接收端(如第一通信设备)的RLC。
以发送端为例，高层数据(如PDCP)在经过左边链路的网络编码后，可将数据进行缓存，如缓存在NC buffer中，并根据MAC层资源进行发送；当接收到来自右边链路的RLC状态报告(即第四信息)时，路由(routing)模块可将RLC状态报告发送至RLC/NC控制(control)模块中，用于指示是否继续发送第一数据块的数据。
以接收端为例，TB在经过routing分流后，传递到了NC译码器侧；NC译码器可以根据K的数量，以及每个TB头所指示的网络编码内容，判断当前TB所属的第一数据块是否可被解码(如通过NC包计数(NC packet counting)模块)；若基于该K个子块可成功解码该第一数据块(如K大于或等于预设阈值)，则RLC/NC control模块可以向发送端发送一个NC肯定应答；若基于该K个子块不可成功解码该第一数据块(如K小于预设阈值)，则发送端可将接收到的TB存储在NC buffer中。
可选地，第四信息包括第一数据块的索引和/或指示信息，指示信息用于指示第四信息是否包含其他第一数据块的信息；或者，第四信息用于指示用于译码该第一数据块所需的传输块和/或子块的数量。
例如，第四信息中包括第一数据块的索引，第四信息用于通知第二通信设备停止发送该第一数据块的数据。第二通信设备从第一通信设备接收到该第四信息后，根据该第一数据块的索引，获知停止发送该第一数据块的数据。一种可能的情形，若第四信息用于指示用于译码第一数据块还需要的传输块和/或子块的数量为0，则第二通信设备确定停止发送第一数据块的子块。
再例如，第四信息中包括信息#B和第一数据块的索引，信息#B用于通知是否继续发送该第一数据块的数据。第二通信设备从第一通信设备接收到该第四信息后，根据该第一数据块的索引和信息#B获知停止发送该第一数据块的数据。作为示例，信息#B为1个比特，该信息#B的取值范围为：0,1。若信息#B的取值为“1”，则可认为第四信息用于通知第二通信设备停止发送该第一数据块的数据；若信息#B的取值为“0”，则可认为第四信息用于通知第二通信设备继续发送该第一数据块的数据。
再例如，第四信息包括指示信息，指示信息用于指示第四信息是否包含其他第一数据块的信息。第二通信设备从第一通信设备接收到该第四信息后，第二通信设备根据该指示信息获知该第四信息是否包含其他第一数据块的信息。作为示例，指示信息为1个比特，该指示信息的取值范围为：0,1。若指示信息的取值为“1”，则可认为第四信息包含其他第一数据块的信息；若指示信息的取值为“0”，则可认为第四信息不包含其他第一数据块的信息。
上述举例为示例性说明，本申请实施例并未限定于此。
图15是本申请实施例提供的第四信息的示意图。
如图15所示，作为示例，该第四信息可以包括以下字段：D/C、控制PDU类型(control PDU type，CPT)、A/N、E、R。可以理解，第四信息包括的字段的数量以及名称，均是示例性说明，对此不予限制。
其中，D/C可用于指示该信息是控制信息还是数据信息。在本申请实施例中，图15所示的格式为第四信息的格式，因此该D/C可用于指示该第四信息是控制信息。
其中，CPT可用于指示控制信息类型。举例来说，若CPT取值为“000”，则表示该控制信息用于RLC-AM模式下的ARQ反馈；若CPT取值为“001”，则表示该控制信息用于指示网络编码的传输情况。在本申请实施例中，图15所示的格式为第四信息的格式，因此该CPT取值为“001”。可以理解，上述为示例性说明，关于CPT的取值与控制信息类型的对应关系，本申请实施例不予限制。
其中，A/N可用于指示第一数据块的数据是否需要继续发送。举例来说，每个A/N字段占用1比特，每个A/N都有一个对应的第一数据块编号(NC块编号)，A/N字段和A/N字段对应的第一数据块编号，共同用于指示该第一数据块编号所对应的第一数据块是否还需要继续发送。其中NC块编号例如占用4比特。如图15所示，该第四信息中包括两个A/N字段，每个A/N对应一NC块编号，其表示该第四信息用于反馈该两个NC块的情况，如用于反馈该两个NC块的数据是否需要继续发送。
其中，E可用于指示第四信息是否还包含其他数据块的信息。举例来说，如图15所示，若第一个NC块编号后的E字段取值为“0”，则可认为此时没有其他数据块的A/N需要上报；若第一个NC块编号后的E字段取值为“1”，则可认为还有其他的数据块的A/N需要上报。可以理解，上述为示例性说明，关于E字段取值与是否还包含其他数据块的信息的对应关系，本申请实施例不予限制。
其中，R为预留字段。
以图15所示的格式为例，第二通信设备在接收到第四信息后，可以根据NC块编号以及对应的A/N，决定是否继续发送该NC块编号所对应的数据。举例来说，第二通信设备收到来自第一通信设备的第四信息后，若某一NC块编号对应的A/N字段取值为“0”，则可认为继续发送该NC块编号所对应的数据；若另一NC块编号对应的A/N字段取值为“1”，则可认为不需要继续发送该NC块编号所对应的数据。
可选地，方法1300还包括：第一通信设备的高层根据K个子块和译码第一数据块所需的传输块和/或子块的数量确定数值Q，数值Q为除了K个子块以外译码第一数据块还需要的传输块和/或子块数量；第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第五信息，第五信息用于指示数值Q。一种可能的情况，假设译码第一数据块总共所需的传输块和/或子块的数量为X1，那么Q可以为(X1-K)。其中，若Q为0，则表示停止发送第一数据块的子块。
在本申请实施例中，第四信息和第五信息可以携带于同一信令中，或者也可以携带于不同信令中，对此不予限制。
为便于理解，下面以第一控制信息为DCI，低层为物理层，高层为RLC层，TB的标识为TB的HARQ进程号为例，结合图16介绍本申请实施例提供的数据传输的方法的流程。
图16是本申请实施例提供的一种数据传输的方法1600的示意图。方法1600可以包括如下步骤。
1610，第一通信设备接收来自第二通信设备的N个第一控制信息。相应地，第二通信设备向第一通信设备发送该N个第一控制信息。
其中，N例如可以为大于2或等于2的整数。
在本申请实施例中，假设步骤1610中，N＝3，M＝3，该3个DCI分别指示1个TB。为区分，将该3个DCI记为DCI0，DCI1，DCI2，其中，DCI0、DCI1、DCI2分别用于指示TB0、TB1、TB2，TB0、TB1、TB2用于传输同一数据块(如记为第一数据块)经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块。
一种可能的实现方式，第一通信设备根据该N个第一控制信息中的第一信息的取值是否相同，确定TB之间是否具有关联关系。举例来说，DCI0,DCI1,DCI2中的每个DCI都包括第一信息，DCI0中的第一信息、DCI1中的第一信息、以及DCI2中的第一信息的取值相同，如DCI0,DCI1,DCI2中的第一信息的取值均为“01”。第一通信设备根据DCI0,DCI1,DCI2中的第一信息的取值相同，确定DCI0,DCI1,DCI2指示的TB0,TB1,TB2之间具有关联关系。
可选地，第一通信设备还可以接收其他控制信息，例如第一通信设备还接收来自第二通信设备的DCI3，该DCI3用于指示TB3，TB3用于传输其他数据(如可以是其他业务的数据，或者也可以是其他数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块)。DCI3中可以包括第一信息，且第一通信设备可以根据DCI3中的第一信息确定TB3与TB0,TB1,TB2之间是否具有关联关系。举例来说，DCI0,DCI1,DCI2中的第一信息的取值均为“01”，DCI3中的第一信息的取值为“00”，那么第一通信设备根据DCI0-DCI2中的第一信息的取值相同，DCI3与DCI0,DCI1,DCI2中的第一信息的取值不同，可确定TB3与TB0,TB1,TB2之间不具有关联关系。
上述为示例性说明，关于关联关系的实现方式，可以参考1300中的描述，此处不再赘述。
1620，第二通信设备向第一通信设备发送N个第一控制信息所指示的M个TB。相应地，第一通信设备接收该M个TB。
其中，M可以大于或等于N。第一通信设备根据步骤1610中收到的N个第一控制信息接收M个TB。
例如，第一通信设备根据DCI0接收该DCI0所指示的TB0，根据DCI1接收该DCI1所指示的TB1，根据DCI2接收该DCI2所指示的TB2。
1630，第一通信设备的物理层对M个TB进行信道译码。
假设DCI0,DCI2所指示的TB0,TB2在第一通信设备的物理层信道译码正确，DCI1所指示的TB1在第一通信设备的物理层信道译码错误。
1640，第一通信设备的物理层向RLC层上报M个TB中信道译码正确的TB所传输的子块。
其中，在步骤1640中，第一通信设备的物理层可以向RLC层上报K个子块，该K个子块表示M个TB中信道译码正确的TB所传输的子块，K为正整数。
例如，DCI0,DCI2所指示的TB0,TB2在第一通信设备的物理层信道译码正确，DCI1所指示的TB1在第一通信设备的物理层信道译码错误，因此，第一通信设备的物理层向第一通信设备的MAC层发送TB0和TB2；第一通信设备的MAC层根据TB0和TB2的 MAC头文件信息，将TB0和TB2的数据解复用到对应的逻辑信道上。如，第一通信设备的MAC层将TB0和TB2的数据复用至第一数据块所在的逻辑信道上。
可选地，在步骤1640中，第一通信设备的物理层向RLC层上报K个子块的M1个TB中至少一个TB的HARQ进程号，该M1个TB为M个TB中信道译码正确的TB。举例来说，第一通信设备的MAC层将TB0和TB2中的数据、TB0的HARQ进程号、以及TB2的HARQ进程号复用至第一数据块所在的逻辑信道上。
若第一通信设备还接收DCI3所指示的TB3，第一通信设备的物理层可以对该TB3进行信道译码。假设DCI3所指示的TB3在第一通信设备的物理层信道译码正确，作为示例，若TB3为非数据块的其他数据，则第一通信设备的MAC层将TB3中的数据解复用到对应的逻辑信道上；若TB3为其他数据块的数据(即用于传输其他数据块经过网络编码后的一个或多个子块)，则第一通信设备的MAC层将TB3中的数据以及TB3的HARQ进程号上报至该其他数据块所在的逻辑信道上。其中，第一数据块和其他数据块可以位于同一逻辑信道，或者也可以位于不同逻辑信道，不予限制。
1650，第一通信设备的RLC层向物理层发送第二信息。相应地，第一通信设备的物理层接收来自RLC层的第二信息。
关于第二信息可以参考方法1300中的描述，此处不再赘述。
假设第二信息用于指示成功解码第一数据块，第二信息中包括TB0的HARQ进程号和/或TB2的HARQ进程号，第一通信设备根据该第二信息确定TB0和/或TB2的HARQ进程反馈为ACK。此外，TB0,TB1,TB2具有关联关系，因此第一通信设备根据该第二信息以及关联关系确定TB0,TB1,TB2的HARQ进程反馈均为ACK。可选地，对于TB1的HARQ进程，在drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer超时后，不再开启drx-RetransmissionTimer。或者，对于TB1的HARQ进程，停止或中断drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer，且不再开启drx-RetransmissionTimer。
1660，第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第四信息。
其中，该第四信息用于通知第二通信设备是否继续发送第一数据块的数据。关于第四信息可以参考方法1300中的描述，此处不再赘述。
可选地，方法1600还包括：第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第五信息，第五信息用于指示数值Q。关于第五信息和数值Q，可以参考前面的相关描述，此处不再赘述。
可以理解，上述方法1600仅是一种简单的示例性说明，方法1300中的所有方案都可以用于方法1600中，此处不再赘述。
可以理解，在上述一些实施例中，提到了“传输”，在未作出特别说明的情况下，传输，包括接收和/或发送。例如，传输信号，可以包括接收信号和/或发送信号。
还可以理解，在上述一些实施例中，多次提及网络编码。在本申请实施例中，网络编码可以是具有纠删功能的任意一种编码。例如，参考图9所示的网络编码方式，通过对待传输的数据包进行网络编码，产生额外的冗余包，进而接收端接收该数据包和额外的冗余包，可以通过网络编码的解码(或者称NC译码)恢复出丢掉的数据。
还可以理解，在上述一些实施例中，多次提及控制信息指示TB，其也可以替换为控制信息调度TB。举例来说，第一通信设备可以基于第一控制信息接收该第一控制信息所指示的M个TB，表示第一通信设备可以基于第一控制信息接收该第一控制信息所调度的 M个TB，或者表示第一通信设备接收第一控制信息所调度(或者所指示)的M个TB。
还可以理解，在上述一些实施例中，主要以第二信息用于指示在K个子块经过NC译码后是否成功解码第一数据块为例进行了示例性说明，对此不予限制。以第二信息用于指示在K个子块经过NC译码后成功解码第一数据块为例，作为示例，“第二信息用于指示在K个子块经过NC译码后成功解码第一数据块”，还可以替换为第二信息用于指示第一数据块可被解码，或者还可以替换为第二信息用于指示不需要继续传输第一数据块的数据，等等。
还可以理解，在上述一些实施例中，多次提及“K个子块经过NC译码后成功解码第一数据块”，作为示例，“K个子块经过NC译码后成功解码第一数据块”还可以替换为“在K个子块经过NC译码后成功解码第一数据块”，或者还可以替换为“K个子块经过NC译码后第一数据块能够被成功解码”，或者还可以替换为“第一数据块可被解码”等等。
还可以理解，在本申请的各实施例中，主要以第一通信设备和第二通信设备之间的交互为例进行示例性说明，本申请不限于此，第一通信设备可以替换为接收端设备，第二通信设备可以替换为发送端设备。接收端设备可以为终端设备或网络设备，发送端设备也可以为终端设备或网络设备。示例地，“第一通信设备”可以替换为“终端设备”，“第二通信设备”可以替换为“网络设备”。
还可以理解，本申请实施例中的图12至图16中的例子仅仅是为了便于本领域技术人员理解本申请实施例，并非要将本申请实施例限于例示的具体场景。本领域技术人员根据图12至图16的例子，显然可以进行各种等价的修改或变化，这样的修改或变化也落入本申请实施例的范围内。
还可以理解，本申请的各实施例中的一些可选的特征，在某些场景下，可以不依赖于其他特征，也可以在某些场景下，与其他特征进行结合，不作限定。
还可以理解，本申请的各实施例中的方案可以进行合理的组合使用，并且实施例中出现的各个术语的解释或说明可以在各个实施例中互相参考或解释，对此不作限定。
还可以理解，上述各个方法实施例中，由通信设备实现的方法和操作，也可以由可由通信设备的组成部件(例如芯片或者电路)来实现。
相应于上述各方法实施例给出的方法，本申请实施例还提供了相应的装置，所述装置包括用于执行上述各个方法实施例相应的模块。该模块可以是软件，也可以是硬件，或者是软件和硬件结合。可以理解的是，上述各方法实施例所描述的技术特征同样适用于以下装置实施例。
图17是本申请实施例提供的一种数据传输的装置的示意性框图。该装置1700包括收发单元1710。收发单元1710可以用于实现相应的通信功能。收发单元1710还可以称为通信接口或通信单元。
可选地，该装置1700还包括处理单元1720。处理单元1720可以用于进行数据处理。
可选地，该装置1700还包括存储单元，该存储单元可以用于存储指令和/或数据，处理单元1720可以读取存储单元中的指令和/或数据，以使得装置实现前述各个方法实施例中通信设备的动作。
在一种设计中，该装置1700可以是前述实施例中的第一通信设备，也可以是第一通 信设备的组成部件(如芯片)。该装置1700可实现对应于上文方法实施例中的第一通信设备执行的步骤或者流程，其中，收发单元1710可用于执行上文方法实施例中第一通信设备的收发相关的操作，处理单元1720可用于执行上文方法实施例中第一通信设备的处理相关的操作。
一种可能的实现方式，收发单元1710，用于接收N个第一控制信息，N个第一控制信息用于指示M个传输块，N个第一控制信息用于指示M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码NC后的一个或多个子块，其中，N、M为正整数，且M大于或等于N；收发单元1710，还用于基于N个第一控制信息接收M个传输块。
可选地，N个第一控制信息中的一个或多个第一控制信息各自包括第一信息，一个或多个第一控制信息中包括的一个或多个第一信息用于指示M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块，其中，一个或多个第一信息满足预设条件。
可选地，N个第一控制信息中的每个第一控制信息都包括第一信息，N个第一控制信息中包括的N个第一信息用于指示M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块，其中，N个第一信息的取值相同。
可选地，收发单元1710，还用于向第一通信设备的高层发送K个子块，K个子块为M个传输块中信道译码正确的传输块所传输的子块，K为正整数；收发单元1710，还用于向第一通信设备的低层发送第二信息，第二信息用于指示在K个子块经过NC译码后是否成功解码第一数据块。
可选地，第二信息用于指示成功解码第一数据块，处理单元1720，用于在M个传输块中至少一个传输块未信道译码正确的情况下，根据第二信息，确定M个传输块的所有混合自动重传请求HARQ进程的应答信息为肯定应答ACK。
可选地，第二信息用于指示成功解码第一数据块，第二信息包括用于传输K个子块的M1个传输块中至少一个传输块的标识，M1个传输块为M个传输块中信道译码正确的传输块，M1为正整数。
可选地，处理单元1720，用于根据该至少一个传输块的标识以及关联关系，确定M个传输块的标识。
可选地，收发单元1710，还用于向第一通信设备的高层发送第三信息，第三信息用于指示M1个传输块中至少一个传输块的标识。
可选地，处理单元1720，用于根据预设标识和第一数据块所对应的逻辑信道和/或无线数据承载，确定M个传输块的标识，其中，第一数据块所对应的逻辑信道和/或无线数据承载用于传输预设标识对应的传输块，预设标识包括M个传输块的标识。
可选地，收发单元1710，还用于获取预设标识的信息，预设标识的信息包括：起始标识、结束标识、标识的数量。
可选地，传输块的标识为传输块的HARQ进程号或传输块的索引。
可选地，处理单元1720，用于停止接收和/或停止解码用于传输第一数据块的传输块；和/或，停止接收或停止监测第二控制信息，第二控制信息用于指示M个传输块中的至少一个传输块的重传；其中，K个子块为M个传输块中信道译码正确的传输块所传输的子块，K为正整数。
可选地，收发单元1710，还用于接收X个第三控制信息，X个第三控制信息用于指 示L个传输块，其中，X、L为正整数，且L大于或等于X；若L个传输块与M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块，则处理单元1720，用于停止接收和/或停止解码L个传输块。
可选地，收发单元1710，还用于接收第一配置信息，第一配置信息用于配置L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，其中，L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示物理控制信道为媒体接入控制MAC实体指示一个新传后的持续时间，和/或，L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器包括drx-InacvitityTimer；和/或，L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示不连续接收DRX开始的持续时间，和/或，L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器包括drx-onDurationTimer。
可选地，处理单元1720，用于停止或关闭L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
可选地，收发单元1710，还用于接收第二配置信息，第二配置信息用于配置M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示等待M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的重传的最大持续时间，和/或，M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器包括drx-RetransmissionTimer；和/或，M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示MAC实体期望接收HARQ重传分配的最小持续时间，和/或，M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器包括drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer。
可选地，处理单元1720，用于停止或关闭M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
可选地，处理单元1720，用于若未成功解码第一数据块，则开启M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
可选地，处理单元1720，用于在drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer超时后的下一个相邻时间单元，开启M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器drx-RetransmissionTimer。
可选地，收发单元1710，还用于向第二通信设备发送第四信息，第四信息用于通知第二通信设备是否继续发送第一数据块的子块。
可选地，在成功解码第一数据块的情况下，第四信息用于通知第二通信设备停止发送第一数据块的子块。
可选地，第四信息包括第一数据块的索引和/或指示信息，指示信息用于指示第四信息是否包含其他第一数据块的信息；或者，第四信息用于指示用于译码第一数据块所需的传输块和/或子块的数量。
可选地，收发单元1710，还用于向第一通信设备的高层发送K个子块，K个子块为M个传输块中信道译码正确的传输块所传输的子块，K为正整数；处理单元1720，用于根据K个子块和译码第一数据块所需的传输块和/或子块的数量确定数值Q，数值Q为除了K个子块以外译码第一数据块还需要的传输块和/或子块数量；收发单元1710，还用于向第二通信设备发送第五信息，第五信息用于指示数值Q。
可选地，第一通信设备的高层为无线链路控制RLC层、分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层、媒体介入控制MAC层或NC层；和/或，第一通信设备的低层为物理PHY层。
可选地，N为大于或等于2的整数。
该装置1700可实现对应于根据本申请实施例的方法实施例中的第一通信设备执行的步骤或者流程，该装置1700可以包括用于执行图12至图16所示实施例中的第一通信设 备执行的方法的单元。
在另一种设计中，该装置1700可以是前述实施例中的第二通信设备，也可以是第二通信设备的组成部件(如芯片)。该装置1700可实现对应于上文方法实施例中的第二通信设备执行的步骤或者流程，其中，收发单元1710可用于执行上文方法实施例中第二通信设备的收发相关的操作，处理单元1720可用于执行上文方法实施例中第二通信设备的处理相关的操作。
一种可能的实现方式，收发单元1710，用于向第一通信设备发送N个第一控制信息，N个第一控制信息用于指示M个传输块，N个第一控制信息用于指示M个传输块具有关联关系，关联关系用于指示M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码NC后的一个或多个子块，其中，N、M为正整数，且M大于或等于N；收发单元1710，还用于向第一通信设备发送M个传输块。
可选地，N个第一控制信息中的一个或多个第一控制信息包括第一信息，一个或多个第一控制信息中包括的第一信息用于指示M个传输块具有关联关系。
可选地，N个第一控制信息中的每个第一控制信息都包括第一信息，N个第一控制信息中包括的N个第一信息的取值相同时M个传输块具有关联关系。
可选地，收发单元1710，还用于接收来自第一通信设备的第四信息，第四信息用于通知第二通信设备是否继续发送第一数据块的子块。
可选地，第四信息包括第一数据块的索引和/或指示信息，指示信息用于指示第四信息是否包含其他数据块的信息；或者，第四信息用于指示用于译码第一数据块所需的传输块和/或子块的数量。
可选地，N为大于或等于2的整数。
可选地，收发单元1710，还用于接收来自第一通信设备的第五信息，第五信息用于指示数值Q，数值Q为除了K个子块以外译码第一数据块还需要的传输块和/或子块数量，K个子块为M个传输块中信道译码正确的传输块所传输的子块，K为正整数。
该装置1700可实现对应于根据本申请实施例的方法实施例中的第二通信设备执行的步骤或者流程，该装置1700可以包括用于执行图12至图16所示实施例中的第二通信设备执行的方法的单元。
有关该装置1700更详细的描述可以参考上文方法实施例中相关描述直接得到，在此不再赘述。
应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述各方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
还应理解，这里的装置1700以功能单元的形式体现。这里的术语“单元”可以指应用特有集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、电子电路、用于执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器(例如共享处理器、专有处理器或组处理器等)和存储器、合并逻辑电路和/或其它支持所描述的功能的合适组件。在一个可选例子中，本领域技术人员可以理解，装置1700可以具体为上述实施例中的通信设备(如第一通信设备，又如第二通信设备)，可以用于执行上述各方法实施例中与通信设备对应的各个流程和/或步骤，为避免重复，在此不再赘述。
上述各个方案的装置1700具有实现上述方法中通信设备(如第一通信设备，又如第 二通信设备)所执行的相应步骤的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块；例如收发单元可以由收发机替代(例如，收发单元中的发送单元可以由发送机替代，收发单元中的接收单元可以由接收机替代)，其它单元，如处理单元等可以由处理器替代，分别执行各个方法实施例中的收发操作以及相关的处理操作。
此外，上述收发单元1710还可以是收发电路(例如可以包括接收电路和发送电路)，处理单元可以是处理电路。
需要指出的是，图17中的装置可以是前述实施例中的设备，也可以是芯片或者芯片***，例如：片上***(system on chip，SoC)。其中，收发单元可以是输入输出电路、通信接口；处理单元为该芯片上集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。在此不做限定。
图18是本申请实施例提供的另一种数据传输的装置示意性框图。该装置1800包括第一模块1870和第二模块1820。
其中，第一模块1870，例如可以为低层模块，如物理层模块。第一模块1870，可用于执行上文方法实施例中通信设备(如第一通信设备)侧的低层执行的操作。
其中，第二模块1820，例如可以为高层模块，如实现NC功能的模块。第一模块1870和第二模块1820可以集成在一起，或者也可以分离设置。第二模块1820，可用于执行上文方法实施例中通信设备(如第一通信设备)侧的高层执行的操作。
一种可能的方式，第一通信设备接收来自第二通信设备的M个传输块，M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码NC后的一个或多个子块，其中，M为正整数；第一模块1870用于向第二模块1820发送K个子块，K个子块为M个传输块中信道译码正确的传输块所传输的子块，K为正整数；第一模块1870还用于接收来自第二模块1820的第二信息，第二信息用于指示在K个子块经过NC译码后是否成功解码第一数据块。有关该装置1800更详细的描述可以参考上文方法实施例中相关描述直接得到，在此不再赘述。
图19是本申请实施例提供的又一种数据传输的装置的示意性框图。该装置1900包括处理器1980，处理器1980与存储器1920耦合，存储器1920用于存储计算机程序或指令和/或数据，处理器1980用于执行存储器1920存储的计算机程序或指令，或读取存储器1920存储的数据，以执行上文各方法实施例中的方法。
在一些实施例中，处理器1980为一个或多个。
在一些实施例中，存储器1920为一个或多个。
在一些实施例中，该存储器1920与该处理器1980集成在一起，或者分离设置。
在一些实施例中，如图19所示，该装置1900还包括收发器1930，收发器1930用于信号的接收和/或发送。例如，处理器1980用于控制收发器1930进行信号的接收和/或发送。
作为一种方案，该装置1900用于实现上文各个方法实施例中由设备(如第一通信设备，又如第二通信设备)执行的操作。
应理解，本申请实施例中提及的处理器可以是中央处理单元(central processing unit，CPU)，还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、 分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
还应理解，本申请实施例中提及的存储器可以是易失性存储器和/或非易失性存储器。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)。例如，RAM可以用作外部高速缓存。作为示例而非限定，RAM包括如下多种形式：静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。
需要说明的是，当处理器为通用处理器、DSP、ASIC、FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件时，存储器(存储模块)可以集成在处理器中。
还需要说明的是，本文描述的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有用于实现上述各方法实施例中由设备(如第一通信设备，又如第二通信设备)执行的方法的计算机指令。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，包含指令，该指令被计算机执行时以实现上述各方法实施例中由设备(如第一通信设备，又如第二通信设备)执行的方法。
上述提供的任一种装置中相关内容的解释及有益效果均可参考上文提供的对应的方法实施例，此处不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个***，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。此外，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。例如，所述计算机可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心 进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk，SSD)等。例如，前述的可用介质包括但不限于：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (39)

  1. 一种数据传输的方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    第一通信设备接收N个第一控制信息，所述N个第一控制信息用于指示M个传输块，所述N个第一控制信息还用于指示所述M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码NC后的一个或多个子块，其中，N、M为正整数，且M大于或等于N；
    所述第一通信设备基于所述N个第一控制信息接收所述M个传输块。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述N个第一控制信息中的一个或多个第一控制信息各自包括第一信息，所述一个或多个第一控制信息中包括的一个或多个所述第一信息用于指示所述M个传输块用于传输所述第一数据块经过NC后的所述一个或多个子块，其中，所述一个或多个所述第一信息满足预设条件。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述N个第一控制信息中的每个第一控制信息都包括第一信息，所述N个第一控制信息中包括的N个所述第一信息用于指示所述M个传输块用于传输所述第一数据块经过NC后的所述一个或多个子块，其中，N个所述第一信息的取值相同。
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备基于所述N个第一控制信息接收所述M个传输块之后，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备的低层向所述第一通信设备的高层发送K个子块，所述K个子块为所述M个传输块中信道译码正确的传输块所传输的子块，K为正整数；
    所述第一通信设备的高层向所述第一通信设备的低层发送第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示在所述K个子块经过NC译码后是否成功解码所述第一数据块。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信息用于指示成功解码所述第一数据块，所述方法还包括：
    在所述M个传输块中至少一个传输块未信道译码正确的情况下，所述第一通信设备的低层根据所述第二信息，确定所述M个传输块的所有混合自动重传请求HARQ进程的应答信息为肯定应答ACK。
  6. 根据权利要求4或5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信息用于指示成功解码所述第一数据块，
    所述第二信息包括用于传输所述K个子块的M1个传输块中至少一个传输块的标识，所述M1个传输块为所述M个传输块中信道译码正确的传输块，M1为正整数。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备根据所述M1个传输块中所述至少一个传输块的标识，确定所述M个传输块的标识。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一通信设备的高层向所述第一通信设备的低层发送第二信息之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备的低层向所述第一通信设备的高层发送第三信息，所述第三信息用于指示所述M1个传输块中所述至少一个传输块的标识。
  9. 根据权利要求4或5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信息用于指示成功解码 所述第一数据块，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备根据预设标识和所述第一数据块所对应的逻辑信道和/或无线数据承载，确定所述M个传输块的标识，其中，所述第一数据块所对应的逻辑信道和/或无线数据承载用于传输所述预设标识对应的传输块，所述预设标识包括所述M个传输块的标识。
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备获取所述预设标识的信息，所述预设标识的信息包括：起始标识、结束标识、标识的数量。
  11. 根据权利要求6至10中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述传输块的标识为传输块的HARQ进程号或传输块的索引。
  12. 根据权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在成功解码所述第一数据块的情况下，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备停止接收和/或停止解码用于传输所述第一数据块的传输块；和/或，
    所述第一通信设备停止接收或停止监测第二控制信息，所述第二控制信息用于指示所述M个传输块中的至少一个传输块的重传。
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备基于所述N个第一控制信息接收所述M个传输块之后，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备接收X个第三控制信息，所述X个第三控制信息用于指示L个传输块，其中，X、L为正整数，且L大于或等于X；
    所述第一通信设备停止接收和/或停止解码用于传输所述第一数据块的传输块，包括：
    若所述L个传输块与所述M个传输块用于传输所述第一数据块经过NC后的一个或多个子块，则所述第一通信设备停止接收和/或停止解码所述L个传输块。
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备接收第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息用于配置所述L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，
    其中，所述L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示物理控制信道为媒体接入控制MAC实体指示一个新传后的持续时间，和/或，所述L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器包括drx-InacvitityTimer；
    和/或，
    所述L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示不连续接收DRX开始的持续时间，和/或，所述L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器包括drx-onDurationTimer。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备停止接收和/或停止解码所述L个传输块，包括：
    所述第一通信设备停止或关闭所述L个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
  16. 根据权利要求12所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备接收第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息用于配置所述M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，
    所述M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示等待所述M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的重传的最大持续时间，和/或，所述M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应 的定时器包括drx-RetransmissionTimer；
    和/或，
    所述M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器用于指示MAC实体期望接收HARQ重传分配的最小持续时间，和/或，所述M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器包括drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备停止接收或停止监测第二控制信息，包括：
    所述第一通信设备停止或关闭所述M个传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
  18. 根据权利要求16所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    在未成功解码所述第一数据块的情况下，所述第一通信设备开启所述M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备开启所述M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器，包括：
    在所述M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器drx-HARQ-RTT-Timer超时后的下一个相邻时间单元，所述第一通信设备开启所述M个传输块中重传的传输块的HARQ进程所对应的定时器drx-RetransmissionTimer。
  20. 根据权利要求1至19中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备基于所述N个第一控制信息接收所述M个传输块之后，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第四信息，所述第四信息用于通知所述第二通信设备是否继续发送所述第一数据块的子块。
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其特征在于，在成功解码所述第一数据块的情况下，所述第四信息用于通知所述第二通信设备停止发送所述第一数据块的子块。
  22. 根据权利要求20或21所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第四信息包括所述第一数据块的索引和/或指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示所述第四信息是否包含其他数据块的信息；或者，
    所述第四信息用于指示用于译码所述第一数据块所需的传输块和/或子块的数量。
  23. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备基于所述N个第一控制信息接收所述M个传输块之后，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备的低层向所述第一通信设备的高层发送K个子块，所述K个子块为所述M个传输块中信道译码正确的传输块所传输的子块，K为正整数；
    所述第一通信设备的高层根据所述K个子块和译码所述第一数据块所需的传输块和/或子块的数量确定数值Q，数值Q为除了所述K个子块以外译码所述第一数据块还需要的传输块和/或子块数量；
    所述第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第五信息，所述第五信息用于指示所述数值Q。
  24. 根据权利要求4至23中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一通信设备的高层为无线链路控制RLC层、分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层、媒体介入控制MAC层或NC层；和/或，
    所述第一通信设备的低层为物理PHY层。
  25. 根据权利要求1至24中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述N为大于或等于2的整数。
  26. 一种数据传输的方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    第二通信设备向第一通信设备发送N个第一控制信息，所述N个第一控制信息用于指示M个传输块，所述N个第一控制信息还用于指示所述M个传输块用于传输第一数据块经过网络编码NC后的一个或多个子块，其中，N、M为正整数，且M大于或等于N；
    所述第二通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送所述M个传输块。
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的方法，其特征在于，所述N个第一控制信息中的一个或多个第一控制信息各自包括第一信息，所述一个或多个第一控制信息中包括的一个或多个所述第一信息用于指示所述M个传输块用于传输所述第一数据块经过NC后的所述一个或多个子块，其中，所述一个或多个所述第一信息满足预设条件。
  28. 根据权利要求26或27所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述N个第一控制信息中的每个第一控制信息都包括第一信息，所述N个第一控制信息中包括的N个所述第一信息用于指示所述M个传输块用于传输所述第一数据块经过NC后的所述一个或多个子块，其中，N个所述第一信息的取值相同。
  29. 根据权利要求26至28中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送所述M个传输块之后，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二通信设备接收来自所述第一通信设备的第四信息，所述第四信息用于通知所述第二通信设备是否继续发送所述第一数据块的子块。
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第四信息包括所述第一数据块的索引和/或指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示所述第四信息是否包含其他数据块的信息；或者，
    所述第四信息用于指示用于译码所述第一数据块所需的传输块和/或子块的数量。
  31. 根据权利要求26至29中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送所述M个传输块之后，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二通信设备接收来自所述第一通信设备的第五信息，所述第五信息用于指示数值Q，数值Q为除了K个子块以外译码所述第一数据块还需要的传输块和/或子块数量，所述K个子块为所述M个传输块中信道译码正确的传输块所传输的子块，K为正整数。
  32. 一种数据传输的装置，其特征在于，包括用于执行权利要求1至31中任一项所述的方法的模块或单元。
  33. 一种数据传输的装置，其特征在于，包括处理器，所述处理器，用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序或指令，以使得所述装置执行权利要求1至31中任一项所述的方法。
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的装置，其特征在于，所述装置还包括所述存储器。
  35. 根据权利要求33或34所述的装置，其特征在于，所述装置还包括通信接口，所述通信接口与所述处理器耦合，
    所述通信接口，用于输入和/或输出信息。
  36. 根据权利要求33至35中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述装置为芯片。
  37. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序或指令，当所述计算机程序或指令在通信装置上运行时，使得所述通信装置执行如 权利要求1至31中任一项所述的方法。
  38. 一种计算机程序产品，其特征在于，所述计算机程序产品包括用于执行如权利要求1至31中任一项所述的方法的计算机程序或指令。
  39. 一种芯片，其特征在于，所述芯片与存储器耦合，用于读取并执行所述存储器中存储的程序指令，以实现如权利要求1至31中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2022/131811 2021-12-03 2022-11-15 数据传输的方法和装置 WO2023098464A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202111466465 2021-12-03
CN202111466465.2 2021-12-03
CN202210017417.3 2022-01-08
CN202210017417.3A CN116248239A (zh) 2021-12-03 2022-01-08 数据传输的方法和装置

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023098464A1 true WO2023098464A1 (zh) 2023-06-08

Family

ID=86611495

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/131811 WO2023098464A1 (zh) 2021-12-03 2022-11-15 数据传输的方法和装置

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2023098464A1 (zh)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105515719A (zh) * 2014-09-24 2016-04-20 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种数据传输方法及装置
WO2018170001A1 (en) * 2017-03-16 2018-09-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Multi-harq methods and apparatus for codeblock group based transmissions
CN110034864A (zh) * 2018-01-12 2019-07-19 华为技术有限公司 一种信息发送方法、接收方法和装置
CN113067679A (zh) * 2016-07-18 2021-07-02 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 传输数据的方法和装置

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105515719A (zh) * 2014-09-24 2016-04-20 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种数据传输方法及装置
CN113067679A (zh) * 2016-07-18 2021-07-02 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 传输数据的方法和装置
WO2018170001A1 (en) * 2017-03-16 2018-09-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Multi-harq methods and apparatus for codeblock group based transmissions
CN110034864A (zh) * 2018-01-12 2019-07-19 华为技术有限公司 一种信息发送方法、接收方法和装置

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5290248B2 (ja) 移動局装置
US11677513B2 (en) Retransmission for punctured signals
KR101532789B1 (ko) 재전송 데이터를 처리하는 ｈａｒｑ 동작 방법
EP3603256B1 (en) Network node and method in a wireless communications network
WO2019201249A1 (zh) 通信方法、通信装置及可读存储介质
EP3566353A1 (en) Methods and apparatus in a wireless communications network
CN113328834A (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2022150937A1 (zh) 用于接收数据的方法与装置和用于发送数据的方法与装置
US10652861B2 (en) Uplink grant-free transmission enhancement for latency and reliability
WO2017220855A1 (en) Method and apparatus for performing packet duplication in a multi-connectivity scenario
CN113439468B (zh) 一种数据的传输方法及装置
CN108476099B (zh) 采用重新传送方案的方法和装置
WO2021056154A1 (zh) 一种窗口调整方法及装置、网络设备、终端设备
US20230179343A1 (en) Efficient uplink hybrid automatic repeat request feedback for point to multipoint transmissions
CN112352393B (zh) Nr中多trp传输中用多个pucch的harq-ack处理
CN113259050A (zh) 一种数据传输方法、装置和***
US20180248658A1 (en) Transmitting downlink signals
WO2022237424A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置
WO2022033362A1 (zh) 一种指示信息接收的方法及装置
WO2023098464A1 (zh) 数据传输的方法和装置
CN111756479B (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2019228241A1 (zh) 信号处理的方法和装置
WO2019191911A1 (zh) 数据传输的方法和设备
CN116248239A (zh) 数据传输的方法和装置
WO2022237673A1 (zh) 一种处理数据的方法和装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22900269

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1